16.  ELECTRICAL GENERAL (2.15.97)                                 


     Any discrepancies found within this section of the DCFS should
     be brought to the attentant of the Assistant Director, Plant
     Engineering, Department of Physical Plant, for
     clarification/resolution.


16.  ELECTRICAL BUILDING MODIFICATIONS (10.15.96)                 


     Refer to the "Electrical Design Services Manual" for the
     design criteria, specifications, and standard details for the
     electrical work pertinant to this section.



16.  ELECTRICAL DESIGN CONDITIONS                                


     The following information should be clearly shown on the
     General Information Drawing.  Additions and deletions may be
     required if package unit equipment is incorporated in the
     design of facilities.

     A.   Electrical

          Primary
          Secondary
          Loads:
               Lighting
               Devices
               Mechanical
               Total Peake Demand
               Total Connected Load
          Emergency Power

     B.   Determine the economic feasibility of incorporating solar
          energy thermal ice storage, and variable frequency
          technologies for space heating, cooling, and water
          heating into the building design and proposed energy
          systems.  This is required if included in the scope of
          work set forth in the project program.

          Economic feasibility for each function shall be
          determined by comparing the estimated cost of energy
          procurement using conventional sources and the estimated
          cost of using energy saving technologies during the
          economic life of the proposed building.  Assumptions
          about future energy costs shall be listed.

     C.   Initial design documentation supportive data, load
          calculations, and a summary of the system proposed.

     D.   All electrical drawings shall be completed on 1/4" (or
          larger) scale drawings.  This shall include all rooms
          with large quantities of mechanical, plumbing, or
          electrical equipment or piping; including mechanical and
          electrical rooms, restrooms, kitchens, etc.



16.  ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND DOCUMENTATION                         


     A.   All service entry equipment shall be UL listed for such
          application and AIC rating shall be required for each
          component of the equipment.  Series ratings for fault
          capabilities is not acceptable.

     B.   Calculations shall include, but not be limited to, fault
          current, over current coordination, KVA by switchboard,
          KVA by panel, KVA of lighting, KVA of receptacles,
          voltage drop at feeder/panel during motor start, lighting
          illumination levels, power factor, peake demand, and
          diversity factor.

     C.   Electrical schedules shall include the following
          information:  schedule name, location, mounting, main
          device, bussing, interrupting capacity (integrated
          rating), voltage, phase, connected lighting load,
          connected power load, connected receptacle load, and
          expected demand.  Each circuit shall include the
          following:  circuit number, description of load served,
          wire size, connected load, and circuit breaker size.

     D.   All power, lighting, and distribution panels, switchgear,
          MCG's transformers, and switches (disconnect and
          transfer) shall be labeled with room number, circuit
          number, and panel or device number for the power source
          feeding the device.

     E.   All medium voltage manholes shall be drawn in a fold-down
          detail.

     F.   Typical drawings are to be shown in the Appendix.

     G.   Electrical power and lighting plans shall be drawn on
          separate drawings.

     H.   Performance data for electrical equipment shall be shown
          on the drawings.  This data may also be included in the
          specification but shall be carefully edited for
          conflicts.

     I.   Panel schedules and switchboard schedules shall be
          designed in accordance with Department of Architecture,
          Engineering, and Construction's direction.

     J.   All switchboard and panel board legend information shall
          be typed and shall include room numbers for locations of
          loads being served, as well as CB# and panel where device
          receives power.

     K.   For a design-build contract all calculations shall be
          received by the 50% CD submission.

     L.   Labeling nomenclature shall be in accordance with Plant
          Engineering, Department of Physical Plant's requirements.

     M.   Campus color codes for communication, fire, power, and
          CCMS use shall be applied as set forth below.

                    SYSTEM NAME              COLOR
          ____________________________________________________

                    CCMS                     Green
                    Communications           Blue
                    Fire Alarm               Red
                    Security                 Yellow
                    REES                     White

     N.   Operation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with
          each major piece of equipment.  Wiring diagrams, spare
          parts lists and vendor contact numbers shall be supplied
          as part of these submittals.  Fire alarm O&M manuals
          shall provide a riser, wiring and annunciator diagram.



16.  ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION (5.1.96)                            


     A.   Building electrical service shall be supplied via campus
          13,200 volt distribution system.  All primary connections
          are loop configured and will apply S&C low profile
          outdoor switchgear.

     B.   All electrical distribution configuration shall provide
          the highest level of segregation when program documents
          identify distinct tenant space allocations.  Opportunity
          for utility sub-metering shall be considered for
          facilities having auxiliary occupants.

     C.   Service entry disconnecting means shall be one or more
          circuit breakers for services of 400 amps or less.  For
          services greater than 400 amps a single main breaker
          shall be applied.  Fused disconnects are not acceptable.

     D.   The raceway between service entry equipment and
          transformer secondary or generator shall include
          provision of 50% spares.

     E.   All outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 4 and accessible
          from all sides.

     F.   Transformers shall be outdoor, oil-filled  units with
          primary fusing via the S&C switchgear.

     G.   All duct bank incorporated in the primary loop
          distribution shall include, as a minimum, 100% spare
          raceways.

     H.   All cables located in manholes shall be labelled
          indicating origination and destination locations. 
          Contact the Department of Physical Plant for exact
          nomenclature.

     I.   The secondary side of transformer shall include provision
          for 100% spare breakers for conduit serving the service
          entry equipment within the building.



16.  ELECTRICAL LIFE CYCLE COST ANALYSIS                         


     As part of the Electrical Systems selection, a computerized
     life cycle cost analysis is required and shall be used and
     submitted tot he University.  This analysis is to show the
     cost benefit of the systems selected by having compared three
     alternative mechanical systems pre-approved by the design
     project manager.  Incorporate a comprehensive lighting systems
     analysis for participating in the PEPCO rebate program.  This
     comprehensive system/Energy/Life Cycle Analysis will be used
     in systems selections.  ASHRAE approved or based programs such
     as Trane Tracer, York Yes III, Carrier OP Cost, DOE II,
     Trakload, or approved equal shall be used.



16.  ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS                                      


     A.   Wall mounted electric water coolers shall be specified in
          accordance with current code requirements, including ADA.

     B.   Surfaces adjacent to water coolers shall be made of water
          resistant materials.



16.  EMERGENCY GENERATORS (8.1.96)                               


     A.   Emergency power for the following systems is required:

          1.   Fire Alarm
          2.   Security
          3.   Emergency Lighting
          4.   Telephone Service
          5.   CCMS
          6.   Other systems as may be needed/identified by the
               University.

          Where applicable, new loads shall be connected to
          existing generators to maximize the use of existing
          equipment.

     B.   Fuel to power the generator shall be selected on the
          basis of cost and availability with a preference for
          natural gas followed by fuel oil and propane gas.

     C.   Acceptable locations for Emergency Generators:

          1.   SCUB
          2.   Basement or ground floor of building,
          3.   A weather protected enclosure meeting noise
               abatement standards adjacent to building.

          No other locations are acceptable.

     D.   Generator exhaust shall not be discharged in a fashion to
          cause it to enter any building's air handling system or
          into pedestrian walkways.

     E.   Generator rooms must be large enough to enable repairs.
          Access doors must be large enough to permit removal and
          replacement of the generator without having to dismantle
          the generator in any way.

     F.   The generator shall be run for several hours while the
          building is in use and occupied; therefore, the generator
          must be properly exhausted and sound-proofed so as not to
          interfere with the building's usage.

     G.   Overhead lighting, on an emergency circuit, is required
          in the generator room or within the weather protected
          enclosure while the generator is operational.



16.  EMERGENCY POWER (5.1.96)                                    


     A three phase, 60 Hertz emergency power generator shall be
     provided for emergency telephone service, fire alarm system,
     security systems, egress and emergency (life safety) lighting
     in all corridors, vestibules and stairwells, the CCMS, any
     critical laboratory equipment, as well as for mechanical
     equipment which could cause catastrophic losses if power was
     interrupted (i.e. sump pumps, pipe heaters, etc.) and for all
     other spaces as designated in the Facility Program.  Emergency
     lighting shall also be provided in major mechanical and
     electrical spaces to permit emergency equipment inspection and
     in occupied spaces as required (especially windowless spaces
     such as restrooms) to permit safe evacuation of the building. 
     Voltage output and control of emergency generator shall be
     determined by the Consultant.  Fuel to power the generator
     drive shall be selected on the basis of cost and availability
     with a preference for natural gas followed by fuel oil and
     propane gas.  Provide connections from Automatic Transfer
     System (ATS) to CCMS, to monitor generator's status (on/off).



16.  ENERGY AND ENERGY ANALYSIS (11.15.96)                        


     A.   Energy

          The University regards the reduction of energy
          consumption as an important objective in all University
          facilities.

          To comply with the requirements of this manual, the 
          design shall meet the Energy Performance Index, using the
          procedures detailed in the University Manual in order to
          demonstrate that the design meets the energy performance
          criteria.

          To be fully cost effective, energy conservation measures
          must be given early and careful consideration during the
          design phase of a new construction project.  To ensure
          that energy conservation is given priority status, an
          independent Energy Analyst shall be utilized.  The role
          of this Energy Analyst shall be to:

          1.   Review and coordinate all disciplines within the
               design team to achieve the most optimal energy
               efficient design;

          2.   Review architectural, mechanical, and lighting
               submissions for compliance with energy guidelines
               developed by the University, prior to submission to
               the University;

          3.   Perform energy and life cycle analysis, to
               influence the building design to minimize future
               energy expenditures, and to achieve the
               University's desired energy budget;

          4.   Attend early design meetings to address building
               site, orientation, and shape as factors in energy
               consumption;

          5.   Calculate the projected energy cost of various
               design alternatives, as requested by the
               University;

          6.   Prepare required energy reports and certificates to
               obtain PEPCO rebates and for other purposes.


          In addition, the University intends to take advantage of
          PEPCO's New Building Design Program whenever it is cost
          effective to do so.  Accordingly, a design study or
          building simulation based upon the requirements of the
          PEPCO New Building Design Program, Option 1,
          Comprehensive Incentive Plan shall be provided.  A list
          of the conservation technologies to be included in the
          study are to be submitted to the University during the
          initial stages of the study.  Various energy conservation
          equipment and building components shall be considered in
          the study, and these considerations shall be available to
          the University for reviews.  All the required information
          shall be submitted to PEPCO including application forms. 
          Besides the information which PEPCO requires, the study
          shall provide life cycle costing, to include cost
          comparisons between standard equipment and building
          components and those recommended, energy and PEPCO
          incentive savings, and simple payback.

          In designing for energy conservation, the entire facility
          shall be considered, its site and prevailing climatic
          conditions.  Interactions among these elements as well as
          the facility's energy using systems must be taken into
          account.  Design elements and sub-systems must be
          analyzed to arrive at the most appropriate mix of energy
          conservation measures.

     B.   Energy Analysis

          Any building includes a diverse collection of spaces and
          functions with varying environmental requirements. 
          Therefore, a system that is both efficient and
          functionally responsive shall be developed.  This
          includes conducting a comprehensive Energy Study of the
          building and a cost/benefit analysis of available energy
          saving alternatives.  The following considerations have
          been specifically designated for evaluation.  Other such
          considerations shall be investigated which affect the
          quality of the building environment and the cost of
          operating its system.

          1.   Design variations in the fenestration, thermal
               resistance for the exterior surfaces, and building
               geometries which take advantage of passive energy
               conservation systems.

          2.   Systems selection contingent on life cycle cost and
               compatibility with building needs.  A minimum of
               three different systems are to be analyzed.

          3.   Instrumentation of the building so that the
               building automatic central control systems will
               monitor and control the various components.

          4.   Functional zoning of the building by use and
               exposure.

          At the Design Development submittal stage, provide a
          formal written analysis to include, but not limited to:

          1.   Single line, conceptualized schematic system
               drawings on floor plans.  All HVAC duct work shall
               be drawn double line in plan view regardless of
               scale.

          2.   Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning block
               and zone load calculations.

          3.   Economic cost/benefit study of the system chosen
               and compared to alternatives chosen.

          4.   A computer energy analysis of the building system's
               energy consumption, operation, and maintainability
               over a period of not less than five years to
               compare life cycle costs for the various HVAC
               systems.  It is desired to obtain from this
               analysis the projected cost of operation by varying
               hours of use and occupancy in the computer program. 
               One of the following shall be used:

               DOE - 2   Computer Program
               Order:    National Technical Information
                         5285 Port Royal Road
                         Springfield, VA 22161

               Info: 1.  Lawrence Berkley Lab
                         University of Calif.
                         Berkley, CA 94720
                         (415) 486-5711

                     2.  TRACE Computer Program
                         12320 Parklawn Drive
                         Rockville, MD 20852
                         (301) 984-2400

                     3.  E20-II Computer Program
                         Box 4808
                         Carrier Parkway
                         Syracuse, N.Y. 13221
                         (315) 432-6000



16.  FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (11.15.96)                            


     The following equipment shall be included as part of a
     comprehensive system for fire protection in accordance with
     NFPA 101, Life Safety Code and approved by DAEC.

     A.   A complete multiplex fire alarm system with a control
          panel located in a designated fire protection services
          room, or as specified.

     B.   A textually graphic annunciator in the main lobby areas
          and other locations as designated.

     C.   Standard fire alarm signals, claxon horns and flashing
          lights located throughout the building.

     D.   The connection of the system with the Central Control and
          Monitoring System.

     E.   The use of smoke detectors, magnetic door releases,
          manual pull stations, and HVAC controls where
          appropriate, and as required.

     F.   A complete automatic sprinkler system throughout the
          building with main controls in a designated fire
          protection services room.

     G.   A complete standpipe system (combined with the sprinkler
          system) for fire department use in areas of the building
          with three or more stories and as directed.

     H.   Fire extinguisher cabinets.

     The entire system and all equipment is to be designed and/or
     specified in accordance with the latest addition of all
     applicable codes and standards.

     In cases in which sensitive electronic equipment is to be
     located within the facility, it will be necessary to design a
     fire detection system capable of interrupting the power supply
     to the equipment.  Halon or carbon dioxide type suppression
     systems shall not be specified.

     Coordination with the Department of Physical Plant, through
     DAEC to insure conformity of all new fire protection equipment 
     is required.



16.  LIGHTNING PROTECTION (9.15.96)                               


     Lightning Protection should be evaluated in accordance with
     NFPA 78.  Buildings in the "moderate to severe" category of
     exposure and higher should be equipped with a UL listed
     lightning protection system.  The system should be carefully
     designed to ensure that static discharges are provided with an
     adequate path to ground.  Surge arresters on the main
     electrical service should also be considered.



16.  LUMINAIRES (5.1.96)                                         


     A.   Exterior

          1.   Outside street and walkway lighting shall
               incorporate the Guardco campus standard fixture or
               approved equal with metal halide lamping.  Existing
               campus poles shall be Corten weathering steel with
               tapered square construction.  If unavailable,
               acceptable pole substitutes include, baked enamel
               on aluminum or fiber glass with a finish (color) to
               match existing poles. This determination requires
               prior approval of DPP on a project-by-project
               basis.  Parking lot and walkway coverage shall be
               documented by vendor produced lighting submission
               as part of design package.

          2.   Control of parking or walkway lighting served from
               any building shall be enabled by a central
               contractor configuration with a central photoeye
               placed on rooftop operating in a parallel manner
               with time clock control.

          3.   Security lighting shall be supplied for building
               perimeter via wall pack construction for a metal
               halide fixture.  All light fixtures shall be
               centrally switched via a contractor on single
               photoeye control with time clock in parallel
               operation.

     B.   Lighting equipment pertaining to code required
          illumination shall be supported by an emergency
          generator.

     C.   All mechanical and electrical rooms having disconnecting
          or air handling equipment shall have 50% of connected
          lighting served by an emergency circuit.  All lighting
          shall be switchable at entry to room.

     D.   Exit signs will be LED type (2 watts or less) with red
          letters on a white or metallic silver background.  All
          fire and building code required lighting will be
          supported via emergency generator.  Battery back-up
          systems are not acceptable.  Any application of battery
          back-up systems to accommodate code egress or other
          concerns, will require written acceptance by the
          Department of Physical Plant.  Battery pack exit signs
          are not acceptable.

     E.   All luminaires in general will be 2'x 4' lay-in, troffer
          type fluorescent construction.  Low power ballasts, T-8
          lamps, and tandem wiring to minimize number of ballasts
          shall be specified.  The use of separately switched
          ballasts in three lamp design shall be limited to
          applications mandating specific switched light levels
          that can only be achieved by this method.

          1.   Fluorescent Tube Ballasts for 4' long tubes shall
               conform to the following requirements using ANSI
               Standards:

               1 Lamp

                    UL Listed                     Class P
                    Input Watts                   32
                    Ballast Factor                Greater than .77
                    THD                           Less than 20%
                    Sound Rating                  A
                    Minimum Start Temperature     0 Degrees F
                    Ballast Type                  Electronic
                                                  Instant Start
                    Warranty                      5 Year - 100%
                                                  replacement

               2 Lamp

                    UL Listed                     Class P
                    Input Watts                   52
                    Ballast Factor                Greater than .77
                    THD                           Less than 20%
                    Sound Rating                  A
                    Minimum Start Temperature     0 Degrees F
                    Ballast Type                  Electronic
                                                  Instant Start
                    Warranty                      5 Year - 100%
                                                  replacement

               3 Lamp

                    UL Listed                     Class P
                    Input Watts                   77
                    Ballast Factor                Greater than .77
                    THD                           Less than 20%
                    Sound Rating                  A
                    Minimum Start Temperature     0 Degrees F
                    Ballast Type                  Electronic
                                                  Instant Start
                    Warranty                      5 Year - 100%
                                                  replacement

               4 Lamp

                    UL Listed                     Class P
                    Input Watts                   101
                    Ballast Factor                Greater than .77
                    THD                           Less than 20%
                    Sound Rating                  A
                    Minimum Start Temperature     50 Degrees F
                    Ballast Type                  Electronic
                                                  Instant Start
                    Warranty                      5 Year - 100%
                                                  replacement

          2.   Design applications of 2'x 2' fluorescent fixtures
               that apply "U-Bent" lamps shall not be permitted.

          3.   Design applications of 8 foot fluorescent lamping
               shall not be permitted.  Tandem 4 foot fixtures
               shall be utilized.

     F.   Corridors

          1.   Corridor lighting will be served via dedicated
               circuits with only hallway lighting and one level
               associated with that circuit.  Corridors may be
               served by a 2 lamp system with aluminum reflector
               or a 3 or 4 lamp with standard white reflector. 
               Black reflectors shall be prohibited.

          2.   Corridor lighting of clear alzak aluminum, semi-
               specular, reflectors in a compact fluorescent
               downlighting fixture is preferred.

     G.   Lamping

          1.   Lamping in any compact fluorescent shall include
               twin-tubes.  Quad tubes are not acceptable.  When
               lumen output is greater than that of a single twin
               tube, double twin tube fixtures shall be specified.

          2.   Mercury vapor lamps are not acceptable.

          3.   Incandescent lamping is an unacceptable
               application.  Any application of incandescent
               lamping shall be approved by DPP based on program
               requirements of the user.

          4.   A compact fluorescent with a clear alzak aluminum,
               semi-specular reflector using a single or double
               twin tube is the appropriate application.

     H.   Recessed Lighting

          1.   Shall apply compact fluorescent lamping (twin
               tubes) whenever dimming function is not required
               and illumination levels can be achieved.

          2.   Dimming applications shall incorporate 90 watt,
               incandescent halogen type lamps for general 150 PAR
               lamping applications.

               For fluorescent applications, fluorescent dimming
               may be utilized, but each use will be scrutinized,
               because of the high cost of dimming ballasts. 
               Options to change lighting levels via switching
               shall be reviewed.

          3.   Recessed applications involving heights greater
               than 12' ceilings with no dimming requirement,
               shall be metal halide for maximum burning and
               illumination levels.

     I.   Lenses

          1.   Lenses shall be either diffuser type or 3.5" louver
               type.  Shallow parabolic will not be considered
               except in areas designated for general purpose
               computer use where glare is being controlled.

          2.   Parabolic diffusers shall not be used in rest
               rooms, storage rooms, corridors, mechanical rooms
               and housekeeping closets.  Acrylic diffusers are
               acceptable.



16.  SECURITY EGRESS SYSTEM FOR INDIVIDUALS WITH DISABILITIES    
     (5.1.96)

     Currently, many facilities that have handicap door openers do
     not have the electronic panic bar.  The handicap door opener
     is activated by the handicap door switch.  During the day the

     door is unlocked and the opener can operate without
     resistance.  The door is locked at night.  When the door is
     locked and the latch prevents the door from opening. 
     Therefore, when the handicap switch is pressed, the door does
     not open.  This condition traps individuals with disabilities
     in the building.

     To alleviate this problem, the following design criteria has
     been established:

     A.   Install an electric panic bar on each door equipped with
          a handicap door opener.

     B.   Interface the door opener with the electric panic bar.

     Reference attached specifications (MPB-851 Mini Power Supply
     with delayed relocking module and electric latch retraction)
     and drawings (No. 9510-3 and 9510-4).  In addition, reference
     Section 8., Finishes and Windows (Hardware) and Section 16.,
     Electrical and (Security Guidelines).



16.  SECURITY GUIDELINES (5.1.96)                                


     A.   All security measures and systems shall be coordinated
          through The Department of Physical Plant, Loss Prevention
          Division (LPD) and incorporate the following:

          1.   Doors

               a.   All entrances shall have an alarm/access
                    control system connected to LPD's main
                    computer.  Each door shall be equipped with
                    either an alarm, a card reader, electric
                    locking devices, and any other necessary
                    equipment to operate the system.  Access shall
                    be controlled by a computer coded card. 
                    Designated doors can be locked or unlocked
                    from the main computer at LPD. (Also Reference
                    Section 16. Security Egress System for
                    Individuals with Disabilities.)

               b.   All exterior doors to be provided with conduit
                    and wiring for future installation of
                    automatic door operators and a card access
                    system.

               c.   Pairs of exterior doors shall have removable
                    mullions for improved security.

               d.   Any required second means of egress shall
                    accommodate wheelchair users.

               e.   All exterior doors which are designated as
                    "EXIT ONLY" shall be installed without
                    hardware on the exterior.

               f.   Service and rear entry doors shall be as
                    entry-proof as possible.  All doors shall have
                    hinge pins which are not exposed to public
                    areas/exterior.

               g.   Garage, service, and rear entry doors are to
                    be as entry-proof as possible.  They should be
                    constructed of heavy-duty construction with
                    locking systems which provide an appropriate
                    degree of security.

          2.   Security Alarm System

               a.   Alarm system controls shall be by Moose
                    Products; access control equipment shall be by
                    Northern Computers; other devices to be by
                    approved vendors per LPD.

               b.   All security alarm equipment and access
                    control system equipment shall be installed in
                    an independent Security Closet.  LPD shall
                    provide exact requirements for location and
                    required electrical service.

          3.   Long corridors should be avoided.

          4.   Rest rooms and stairwells should not be separated
               from areas of high usage.

          5.   Different units within the facility shall be
               separately securable without interfering with
               required egress routes from the building.

          6.   Ground floor windows are discouraged.  If
               installed, ground windows shall be constructed to
               prevent easy entry into the building.

               Surface materials or windows which can be easily
               vandalized should be avoided.  In the event other
               criteria dictates the requirement for operable
               windows, methods for securing these windows are to
               be provided.  Methodology for securing operable
               windows is to be coordinated with the DPP Office of
               Loss Prevention.

          7.   New or expanded stairwells and elevators must
               utilize public spaces for access and egress. 
               Elevators or stairwells should not allow access
               directly into private office areas which would
               jeopardize security to the area.

     B.   All departmental and administrative offices should be
          equipped with heavy duty locksets with anti-friction
          latch bolts approved by the University DPP Lock Shop.



16700 - TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS (11.15.96)                    


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE REQUIREMENTS

    A.   The provisions of the General Conditions, Special
         Conditions, Program Requirements and Division 1, General
         Requirements, apply to the work of this Section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

    A.   Telecommunications service entrance.

    B.   Premises wiring system.

    C.   Broadband type cable video system.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

    A.   Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

    B.   Section 01720 - Product Record Documents.

    C.   Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

    D.   Section 09900 - Painting.

    E.   Section 16100 - Wiring Materials and Methods.

    F.   Section 16300 - Outside Power Transmission and         
         Distribution.

1.04 REFERENCES

    A.   Building Industry Consulting Services International
         (BICSI), "Telecommunications Distributions Methods
         Manual," 1995.

    B.   Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications
         Industry Association (EIA/TIA)-568A, "Commercial Building
         Telecommunications Wiring Standard".

    C.   EIA/TIA-569,"Commercial Building Standard for          
         Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces".

    D.   EIA/TIA-606, "Administration Standard for the
         Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial
         Buildings".

    E.   EIA/TIA-607, "Commercial Building Grounding/Bonding
         Requirements".

    F.   National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 70 - National
         Electrical Code (NEC), 1996.

    G.   Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
         802.3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
         Detection (Ethernet and 10BASE-T)

    H.   LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES./AT&T Systimax Premises Distribution
         System (PDS) Manual

    I.   Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Title 47, Code
         of Federal Regulations. Part 68

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

    A.   Contractor shall install work in accordance with the
         BISCI Methods Manual.

    B.   Contractor shall install work in accordance with the
         LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimax PDS Guidelines.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

    A.   Before the installation of any wire or equipment,
         Contractor shall submit shop drawings and product data
         under provisions of Section 01340, "Shop Drawings,
         Product Data and Samples" for University approval.

    B.   Contractor shall indicate installation details, cable
         routing of copper, fiber and coax, riser diagrams, outlet
         lan, BDF & IDF closet layouts, and system configuration
         on all shop drawings.

    C.   Contractor shall submit all appropriate product data for
         each component.

    D.   Contractor shall submit manufacturer's installation
         instructions.

1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

    A.   Contractor shall submit record documents under provisions
         of Section 01720. "Project Record Documents."

    B.   Contractor shall accurately record location of service
         entrance conduit, termination backboards, outlet boxes,
         messenger cable raceways and cable trays, pull boxes, and
         equipment boxes on 3.5-inch floppy diskettes using
         AutoCad 12.

    C.   Contractor shall document the cable plant and associated
         equipment installation in accordance with Parts 3.19,
         3.20, and 3.21 in this Section.

1.08 QUALIFICATIONS

    A.   Installation of all inside wire, equipment, terminations
         and associated services shall be performed by Lucent
         Technologies Inc./AT&T or a company that is currently a
         Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T Authorized Systimax
         Certified Premise Distribution System Value Added
         Reseller.  For a current list of authorized Lucent
         Technologies Inc./AT&T Contractors contact the Department
         of Communication and Business Services on 301-405-4441. 
         Prior to the final selection of the telecommunications
         sub-contractor, the main contractor shall submit it's
         choice for telecommunications sub-contractor for
         University's approval.

    B.   The company specializing in supplying the products
         specified in this Section shall have a minimum of three
         (3) years experience distributing such supplies, and
         shall be duly authorized by the product manufacturer.

    C.   Installation of all outside cable plant, wire, equipment,
         terminations, splices, and associated services shall be
         performed solely by Lucent Technologies Inc.

1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

    A.   Contractor shall furnish warranty of products and
         workmanship for a minimum of two (2) years from date of
         acceptance by the University.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS

    A.   The Contractor shall install 3/4-inch fire resistant
         plywood with Class A surface in all communications rooms.

    B.   All termination backboards shall be installed on all
         walls of each communications room.

    C.   Minimum backboard size shall be 4' x 8' unless otherwise
         approved by the University.

2.02 STATION COPPER CABLE

    A.   All unshielded twisted pair (UTP) station copper cable
         supporting voice communications requirements, as well as
         Emergency, Courtesy and Pay Telephones shall be LUCENT
         TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 (where XX is either 10 or 20
         depending on insulation type), and shall meet Category 5
         performance specifications along with the following
         technical specification.:

         Gauge:                        24 AWG
         Insulation:                   PVC (1010) or ECTFE (2061)
         Outside Diameter:             0.17 in (4.3 mm)
         Maximum DC Resistance:        28.6 Ohms/1000 ft.
         Nominal Mutual Capacitance:   14 nF/1000 ft @ 1 kHz
         Attenuation:                  6.3 dB/1000 ft @ 1 MHz
         Characteristic Impedance:     100 Ohms +/- 15% @ 1-25 MHz

    B.   All UTP station copper cable supporting data
         communications requirements shall be LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
         INC./AT&T XX61(where XX is either 10 or 20 depending on
         insulation type), and shall meet the following technical
         specifications:

         Gauge:                        24 AWG
         Insulation:                   PVC (1061) or Teflon (2061)
         Outside Diameter:             0.17 in (4.3 mm)
         Maximum DC Resistance:        28.6 Ohms/1000 ft
         Nominal Mutual Capacitance:   14 nF/1000 ft @ 1 kHz
         Attenuation:                  6.3 dB/1000 ft @ 1 MHz
         Characteristic Impedance:     100 Ohms +/- 15% @ 1-25 MHz

    C.   The cable sheath color for the UTP voice communications
         cabling specified in 2.02A above shall be different from
         the cable sheath color for the UTP data communications
         cabling specified in 2.02B above.

    D.   All copper cable and jumpers shall conform to the REA
         color guide meet NEC article 725-38, 3 (B) 1, 2 and 3.

2.03 RISER COPPER CABLE

    A.   All UTP riser copper cable supporting voice and data
         communications requirements shall be standard 24 gauge,
         paired dual, semi-rigid PVC skin over foamed PE, LUCENT
         TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T ARMM XXX- R6060  (where XXX is the
         number of pairs), and shall meet the following technical
         specifications:

         Gauge:                    24AWG, solid copper           
                                    conductor, twisted pair
         DC Resistance:            25.5 Ohms/1000 ft
         Mutual Capacitance:       16 mF/1000 ft
         Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms +/-15% @ 1-16MHz
         Attenuation:              7.2 dB/1000 ft @ 1 Mhz;
                                    32 dB/1000 ft @ 16MHz

2.04 UNDERGROUND COPPER CABLE

    A.   The underground copper cable supporting voice and data
         communications requirements shall be 24 gauge, paired,
         dual-insulated with foam skin and plastic, flooded by
         FLEXGEL filling compound, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T

         GFMW, and shall meet the following technical
         specifications:

         Gauge:                    24 AWG, solid copper          
                                    conductor
         DC Resistance:            27.3 Ohms/1000 ft
         Mutual Capacitance:       15.7 nF/ft @ 1kHz
         Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms
         Attenuation:              6.4 dB/1000 ft @ 1 MHz

2.05     CABLE PROTECTORS FOR COPPER CABLE

    A.   For all pairs, Contractor shall install three-element gas
         protector modules, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 4B1-EW,
         containing silicon avalanche on both ends (New facility
         and Patuxent Building).

    B.   Contractor shall supply and install 188-type Multipair
         Protector units, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 188B1, for
         all communications equipment and circuits.

2.06 FIBER OPTIC CABLE

    A.   All fiber used shall be multimode type, LUCENT
         TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T ACCUMAX (indoor applications) or
         LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T LIGHTPACK (outdoor
         applications) cable, and shall meet the following
         technical specifications.

         Core Type:                 Graded Index
         Core Diameter:             62.5 (+/- 6) microns
         Core Eccentricity:         1.5% Nominal - 7.5% Max.Core          
         Ovality:                   4% Nominal- 20% Max.
         Cladding Diameter:         125 (+/-2) microns
         Cladding Non-Circularity:  2% Maximum
         Coating Diameter:          245 (+9/-13) microns
         Refracting Index Delta:    2.0% (+/- .3%)
         Numerical Aperture:        0.275
         Bandwidth Windows:         Dual-850 nm & 1300 nm
         Maximum Attenuation:       3.4 dB/km @ 850 mm
                                    1.0 dB/km @ 1300 mm
         Minimum Bandwidth:         160 Mhz/km @ 850 mm
                                    500 Mhz/km @ 1300 mm
         Maximum Field Loss:        0.5 dB

    B.   All fiber cable used shall have the following physical
         characteristics:

         Cable Core:
              Building interior:  900 micron O.D. color-coded 
                                  PVC buffering surrounded by
                                  Aramid yarn strength members.
                        Building exterior:  Loose tube, LXE
                                            Lightpack core
                                            filled with water-blocking compound
                                            surrounded by non-metallic strength
                                            members.

         Cable Composition:
              Building Interior:
                   station:
                        (plenum)      OFNP Flouropolymer jacket
                        (non-plenum)  OFNR PVC jacket
                   riser:             OFNR PVC jacket
              Building exterior:      Non-metallic dielectric

         Cable Strength:              Maximum pulling tension-600
                                       lb.

         Minimum Bend Radii:           (<30% max. pull tension) 10 times cable diameter (>30% max. pull tension)
                                       20 times cable diameter

         Fiber Identification:         Color coding system
                                       adequate to unambiguously
                                       identify each fiber.  See
                                       paragraph 3.16 in this
                                       Section.
2.07 SINGLEMODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE

    A.   Fiber used shall be singlemode type, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
         INC./AT&T DNX General Purp0se OSP Cable Lightpack Core,
         LXE-Nonmetallic Sheath.  4DNX-XXX-BXD (the number of
         fibers (XXX) will be a minmum of 12 and shall be
         specified on the drawings).

2.08 OPTICAL FIBER TERMINATIONS

    A.   All optical fiber cable installed shall be terminated
         with a split-ferrule alignment sleeve and a precision
         ceramic tip.  All optical fiber connectors shall meet the
         following technical specifications:

         Connector Type:          ST
         Fiber Outside Diameter:  125 microns Nominal
         Loss Repeat:             <0.2 dB per 100 reconnects Axial Load Minimum: 35 Pounds Temperature Stability: +0.1 dB Maximum from 20 to +60 F B. Furnish Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T. 2.09 OPTICAL FIBER PATCH CORDS A. Contractor shall provide optical fiber patch cords. The optical fiber patch cords shall be LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T FL2E-E, and shall meet the following technical specifications: Number of fibers: 2 Approximate loss: 0.4 dB/mated connector Minimum bandwidth: 160 MHz-km @ 850 nm 500 MHz-km @ 1300 nm 2.10 CONNECTING BLOCKS A. All UTP copper cable shall be terminated on miniature, high- density, modular LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 110 connecting blocks. B. All optical fiber cable in all Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) rooms shall be terminated in LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T LST1U-72 termination shelves. C. All optical fiber cable in the Building Distribution Frame (BDF) room shall be terminated in an LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T LGS LDS Lightguide Cross Connect Frame utilizing LST1A-72 termination shelves and associated equipment. D. All optical fiber cable connecting the BDF (in the new facility) to one of six (6) Fiber Hub Rooms (designated by the University) shall be terminated in LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T LST1U-72 termination shelves at both ends. 2.11 INTRABUILDING COAXIAL CABLE A. All intrabuilding coaxial cable in the new facility supporting video communications requirements shall be RG-11/U Belden 89292, and shall meet the following technical specifications: Gauge: 14 AWG solid bare copper covered, .064 in Outside Diameter: 0.348 in (8.84 mm) Shields: Duofoil + 61% tinned copper braid Insulation: Black tint Teflon jacket Nominal DC Resistance: 2.5 Ohms/1000 ft Nominal Mutual Capacitance: 16.5 pF/ft @ 1 kHz Attenuation: .15 dB/100 ft @ 1 MHz Characteristic Impedance: 75 Ohms @ 1 MHz 2.12 INTERBUILDING COAXIAL CABLE A. All interbuilding coaxial cable in the new facility supporting video communications requirements shall be P-3-75-500JCASS, and shall meet the following technical specifications: Gauge: 0.111 in. (2.82 mm) nom. Outside Diameter: 0.560 in. (14.22 mm) nom. Outer jacket of medium density polyethylene, solid aluminum sheath and Migra- Heal compound between jacket and sheath Nominal DC Resistance: 0.37 Ohms/1000 ft Attenuation: 0.66 dB/100 ft @ 83 MHz Characteristic Impedance: 75 Ohms @ 1 MHz 2.13 VIDEO SYSTEM PARTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Contractor shall install self-terminating video outlets with a built-in 75 Ohm resistor and a connector actuated switch that automatically terminates the line when a push-on cable connector is removed. B. Coaxial cable equipment: The Contractor shall furnish and install the following equipment or University approved equivalent: Line extender: CCOR LAN-100-2rv Pads (attenuators) for CCOR LAN-100-2rx: PB-0 PB-12 PB-3 PB-15 PB-6 PB-18 PB-9 PB-21 Pads for Line Extender: Forward dbmv of cable @ 450 MHz Eq-450-3 2.5 Eq-450-5 6.2 Eq-450-8 9.9 Eq-450-11 13.8 Eq-450-13 17.3 Eq-450-15 20.9 Splitters and Directional Couplers: Insertion Loss Type Tap Value @ 450 MHz Jerrold SSP-3 4.4 Jerrold SSP-636 7.9, 7.9 4.4 Jerrold SSP-7 7.8 2.5 Jerrold SSP-9 10.0 1.8 Jerrold SSP-12 12.8 1.5 Jerrold SSP-16 16.3 1.2 Full Feature Taps: Insertion Loss Type Tap Value @ 450 MHz Jerrold FFT8-14 14.2 4.3 Jerrold FFT8-17 17.8 1.8 Jerrold FFT8-20 20.0 1.2 Jerrold FFT8-23 22.5 1.0 Jerrold FFT8-26 26.1 0.8 Jerrold FFT8-29 29.2 0.6 Connectors and Other Accessories: Gilbert Parts: Pin Connector: GRS-500-CH-DU-03 Power Blocking Ks-F: GF-625-CH-DCB Chassis-Chassis Connnector: G-KS-KS-M Right Angle Connector: GP-90-S Splice Connector: GRS-500-SP-DU-03 Teflon RG-11 Connector: GF-11-300p-388 F-type terminators: GTR-59-s D-Rings for Mounting Equipment: Type Inside Dimension Outside Dimension Graybar GB 13a 1-7/8" 4-7/8" Graybar GB 13b 3-1/8" 6-1/8" Crimping Tool: Teflon RG-11 Crimper: HCT-775 Testing Equipment: RF Signal Strength Meter: Wavetek SAM III or approved equal must be used for testing. 2.14 OUTLET BOXES A. All outlet boxes supporting voice/data communications requirements shall be double-gang, four (4) inch square, three (3) inch deep minimum galvanized steel boxes with single gang raised tie covers. B. All outlet boxes supporting video communications requirements shall be single gang, four (4) inch deep minimum galvanized steel boxes. 2.15 VOICE/DATA JACKS AND COVER PLATES A. The jack assembly to support voice/data communications requirements shall be a modular, eight (8) position, eight (8) conductor (8P8C) Category 5 performance-rated, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T M100-series information outlet. Each work area information outlet shall be separately colored for visual identification. Inital installations shall utilize Electrical Ivory for the first (voice) faceplate position and Orange for the second (data) position. Subsequent UTP installations shall utilize black and/or other colors aviable through LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T. B. The "pin-out" wiring assignment for the 4-pair UTP copper cable for both voice and data communications from the telecommunications outlet to the IDF shall be consistent with the EIA/TIA-568B Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard. C. All outlet plates shall be Multi-media type LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T M50 Series. This outlet plate shall support two (2) 8P8C modular jacks and one (1) FDDI-type connector. Face plates shall have University approved engraved markings (words or symbols) to uniquely designate data and voice jacks as describes in Part 3.19 of this section. 2.16 DUCTBANK INNERLINERS A. Three (3) innerliners are required for each section. Contractor shall furnish Pi-Mar PVC conduit manufactured by Pyramid Industries Inc. The innerliner shall conform to the following University color code indicating type of media routed in the innerliner: MEDIA INNERLINER COLOR SIZE Fiber Orange 1" Copper Black 1.5" Coaxial Yellow 1.5" 2.17 CABLE LUBRICANT A. Cable pulling lubricant, Ideal Yellow 77 or a University approved equal, shall be utilized when pulling all cable. 2.18 CASES AND SPLICES A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all Building Entrance Splice Cases and shall be LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T type 2000 series closure and accessories. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install all outside plant (OSP) Cable Splice Cases and shall be Preformed Line Products Stainless Steel with Filling Flange and must be filled with a University Approved re-enterable encapsulant. C. The Contractor shall furnish and install a MDF (Patuxent Building) splice case. Furnish Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T Cable Rearrangement Facility to match existing. 2.19 FIRESTOPPING A. Contractor shall provide firestopping protection that shall meet NFPA Life Safety Code #101, 6-2.3.6, "Penetrations and Miscellaneous Openings and Fire Barriers" and the NEC 300.21 "Fire Stopping" regulations and standards. B. All vertical penetrations consisting of conduit, sleeves, or chases shall be firestopped at the bottom of the penetration. C. All horizontal penetrations consisting of conduit, sleeves of chases shall be firestopped on both sides of the penetration. D. Individual cable penetrations in plenum air return areas not enclosed in conduit shall be firestopped. E. Openings made in concrete floors shall be firestopped using a tested system. Thickness or depth of firestop materials shall be as recommended by the material manufacturer and backed by formal ASTM E-814 tests. F. Plenum air return ceiling penetrations for conduit and cables shall be sealed with a system appropriate for the substrate and level of protection required. G. All metal conduits designed for communications with or without wire/cable inside shall be firestopped to restrict transfer of smoke. 2.20 ELEVATOR PHONE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the following Elevator Phone. Installation shall be coordinated with the Elevator Contractor. Manufacturer Description Stock No. Talk-A-Phone Co. Hands-free Phone EPT-100E 5013 North Kedzie Ave. programmed to use Chicago, IL 60625 campus circuit 312-539-1100 assurance equipment B. The location and height shall be ADA compliant and shall be approved by the University prior to installation. 2.21 OUTDOOR EMERGENCY PHONE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the following Emergency Phone. Installation shall be coordinated with the General Contractor. 1. Free Standing Emergency Phone Manufacturer Description Stock No. Code Blue Corporation Vandal resistant Code Blue 1 40 E. 64th Street security unit (CB1) Holland, MI 49422-9322 with: speakerphone, 616-392-8296 keypad, and University of MD software, blue light, and strobe. 2. Wall Mounted Emergency Phone Description Stock No. Vandal resistant Code Blue 2 Security unit (CB2) with: speakerphone, keypad, and University of MD Software, blue light, and strobe. NOTE: Reference Division 2 PERT TELEPHONE INSTALLATION CRITERIA PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SYSTEM DESIGN A. The cabling system to support voice, data, and video requirements has been designed in accordance with BICSI, EIA/TIA, NFPA, NEC, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T, IEEE, and FCC communications. B. The proposed cabling system has been designed and shall be installed in a manner that provides mechanical integrity and symmetry for the cabling media and any associated frames and racks and which also furnishes ease of access and suitability for future rearrangements and changes. C. The transmission media shall be installed through a network of cable trays, conduit, sleeves, and chases and interconnect the various rooms and floors of the building. D. Determination of Station Quantities Quantity and placement of outlets shall be shown on the floor plans. E. Wire Closet design requirements (IDF and BDF): On each floor with more than 60 stations or 6000 net square feet, at least one "walk-in" type wire closet of minimum 110 square feet per 10,000 net square feet of floor space shall be provided. Walk-in closets shall not have width or depth of less than 8'-0". Floors with less than 60 stations or 6000 net square feet shall have closets measuring 7'-0" wide by 5'-0" deep minimum. Closets shall be "stacked" one above the other on each floor and shall be located so as to limit station wiring runs to no more than 150' wire length. Riser penetrations and sleeves shall be located on the left side of the closet wall and shall be sized to accommodate present wiring needs plus 100% spare capacity. All conduit sleeves shall be 4" galvanized intermediate metal conduit cut 2" above closet floor. All spare sleeves shall be capped. All closet penetrations shall have adequate firestopping that meets all applicable codes. [Closet door shall be University standard height double units 3'-0" each, opening outward and equipped with a University standard lockset.] [Office grade HVAC (ambient temperature 68- 74 degrees F) shall be provided.] Contractor shall furnish and install a minimum of two (2), 20 ampere, 120 volt in each IDF and BDF. F. Determination of Minimum Station Quantities: 1. General Office Space: one outlet per 70 net square feet. 2. Faculty Office Space: one outlet per 70 net square feet. 3. Computer Laboratory Space: one outlet per 40 net square feet. Video outlet on front wall. 4. Other Laboratory Space: one outlet per 140 net square feet. Video outlet on front wall, voice/data on back wall. 5. Classroom Space: one outlet centered on front and rear walls. Video outlet on front wall. 6. Lecture Hall: two outlets stage area, two outlets projection area. 7. Conference Rooms: one video outlet located in the front of the room, and one voice/data outlet mounted next to each other. 8. Service/Support Space: one outlet per 40 net square feet for counter services areas and secretarial areas. 9. Miscellaneous Space: one outlet each main mechancial and electrical rooms; courtesy/emergency phone outlet per 5000 NASF, one elevator phone per elevator, and pay telephone outlets in public spaces. G. Station wiring for Emergency, Courtesy, and Pay Telephones shall be wired with one four pair. All other outlets shall be wired with two four pair and two unterminated strands of fiber. The fiber shall have 20" slack coiled in the outlet box and at least 10'-0" neatly coiled at the IDF. See Section 2.02 for the specifications for copper cable and fiber cable. 3.02 FORBIDDEN WORK A. Other than the entrance splice, no cable splices shall be allowed within buildings. B. Aerial cable construction shall not be permitted. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Contractor shall verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Contractor shall verify that field measurements are as shown on the Construction Drawings approved by the University. C. The beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF BACKBOARDS A. All termination backboards in the BDF and IDFs shall be finish painted with durable white enamel under the provisions of Section 09900 prior to installation of any communications equipment. B. All backboards shall be supported as specified under the provisions of Section 16100. C. All backboards shall be marked with the legend "COMM" under the provisions of Section 16915. 3.05 CABLE PULLING A. Contractor shall utilize cable pulling lubricant for all pulls in conduit ducts or innerliners. Not less than three (3) gallons per kilometer shall be used. 3.06 COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES A. Cable routing shall be designed and installed so that cabling and associated equipment does not interfere with the operation or maintenance of any other equipment. No wiring shall be hung, tied to, or supported from anything other than telecommunications raceway or the building structure. B. All cable in accessible spaces shall be designed and installed for easy access. Cable paths above suspended ceilings, mechanical rooms, closets, etc. shall not be blocked or covered in any way that would impede the addition of cable in the future. 3.07 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. To support voice and data communications requirements, Contractor shall install one (1) inch conduit from the outlet box stubbed into the accessible ceiling. Contractor shall conform to the Conduit Installation Schedule in Section 16100 for selection of appropriate conduit type. All telecommunications wiring shall be concealed in conduit or in the ceiling. B. Conduit sleeves shall be four (4) inch trade size minimum. Sleeves shall be Rigid Galvanized Steel for penetrations of concrete slabs, concrete walls, and CMU walls. Sleeves for penetrations of stud walls shall be EMT. All sleeves shall be rigidly installed using appropriate fittings and all masonry penetrations shall be grouted. Sleeves shall project a minimum of six (6) inches beyond wall or floor surface. All penetrations of fire rated construction shall be firestopped with fire- stopping as specified in Part 2.16 of this Section to equal or exceed fire rating of the penetrated material. Sleeves for penetration of walls and floors shall have one hundred percent (100%) spare capacity, and shall be firestopped as per code. C. Any section of conduit containing two (2) 90-degree bends, a reverse bend, of having length greater than one hundred (100) feet shall have an accessible pullbox. All conduits with less than a 50% fill ratio shall have a 3/32-inch polyethylene pull cord appropriately secured at each end. D. No oval or square conduit fittings shall be permitted. No screw type fittings shall be permitted. E. All metallic conduit and raceways shall be appropriately grounded as specified in the National Electric Code. F. Supports and fasteners shall be used to hold all cables, conduits, and trays firmly in place. Supports and fasteners shall be used such that they provide an adequate safety factor. All conduit/cable trays shall be supported from the building structure and not from any other ductwork, pipes, ceiling tiles, or equipment. G. Where cable trays or conduit are not provided (especially between the stubbed-out conduit and the nearest cable tray). Kindorf lay-in pipe hangers, or a University approved equal shall be installed. The lay-in pipe hanger shall be attachable to a floor slab through the use of a pre-threaded lead insert which is suitable for installation of a 3/8-inch "all-thread" rod in a pre- drilled 1/2-inch hole. The threads of the closure bolt on the pipe hanger shall be covered by 3/8-inch copper or aluminum tubing to protect the cabling sheaths. H. Cables placed in hangers in the plenum ceiling area shall be routed high and away from all other electrical and mechanical systems so as to avoid contact with light fixtures, ventilation ducts, sprinkler systems or plumbing piping, motors, or any other electrical devices. The cable shall not be run in parallel with any high voltage electrical wiring. The maximum separation between support points for all cabling shall be eight (8) feet. Lay-in pipe hangers shall be installed so as to accommodate these maximum distance spacings. Hangers shall be installed at directional bend points so as to provide a maximum bend angle of 45 degrees for the supported cabling. I. Contractor shall install 3/16-inch polyethylene pulling string in each empty conduit, and appropriately secured at each end. 3.08 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOMS A. The communications equipment rooms supporting voice, data, and video requirements are to be identified on the construction documents. B. Prior to the installation of any equipment in any of the communications rooms, the Contractor shall provide room layouts, for University approval, for each of the rooms listed above showing the proposed locations of all backboards, termination blocks, distribution panels, security boxes, control boxes, power supplies, etc. required for all communications systems which are part if this specification. 3.09 STATION CABLING AND INSTALLATION A. All voice, data, and video outlets shall be installed in the locations that are conspicuously marked in the building floor plans. If there is a question as to the location of any outlet, it shall be brought to the attention of the University prior to installation. B. All outlets supporting voice and data communications requirements shall be wired with two (2), 4-pair UTP copper cables (Two (2) LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 as specified in Part 2.02 of this Section) as well as one (1) unterminated, 2-strand optical fiber cable (as specified in Part 2.06 of this Section). The optical fiber cable shall have twenty (20) inches slack which shall be coiled at the IDF. For applications where the outlet is designed "DATA ONLY," the outlet shall be wired with one (1) LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 4-pair UTP copper cable and one (1), unterminated 2-strand optical fiber cable. C. Voice or "A" jack: Always the top jack of the outlet designated to accommodate one (1) digital voice station. Wire with one (1), 4-pair LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 UTP copper cable. The "A" jack pairs shall be terminated in the IDF on a row of the 100 block reserved for voice pairs, separate from the "B" jack pairs. D. Data or "B" jack: Always the bottom jack of outlet designed to accommodate one (1) digital data station. Wire with one (1), 4-pair LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T XX61 UTP copper cable. The "B" pairs shall be terminated in the IDF on a row of the 100 block reserved for data pairs, separate from the "A" jack pairs. E. The terminations in the BDF and all IDFs of all cable pairs for the "A" jacks and the cable pairs for the "B" jacks shall be on termination fields. The Contractor shall not utilize patch cords. F. All wiring supporting voice and data communications shall conform to IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T and Category 5 wiring standards. 3.10 RISER CABLING AND INSTALLATION A. In the BDF and all IDFs, connecting blocks shall be modular, high-density, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 110- type or a University approved equal, with clear protective covers. All telecommunication rooms shall be grounded by means of a #6 AWG insulated copper ground wire connected to the building ground system. The BDF shall have three-element gas protector modules, Lucent Technologies Inc./AT&T 4B1-EW, surge protection with silicon avalanche sneak fuses adequate for protecting all circuits entering the building. NOTE: All closet layouts shall be approved by the University before installation of any equipment or termination of any wiring. B. Contractor shall install UTP vertical copper cabling between the BDF and each IDF to support voice and data communications requirements. Each riser cable shall be homerun from the BDF to each IDF in the conduit and sleeves provided. In both the BDF and IDF, the cable pairs shall be terminated on LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T 110 connecting blocks and appropriately cross- connected to the UTP horizontal copper cabling (in the IDF) and the UTP backbone copper cabling (in the BDF). The size of the riser cables for both voice and data communications from the BDF to each IDF shall be calculated using the following formula: # of outlets X 4 pairs X 120%="#" of voice riser copper pairs. # of outlets X 4 pairs X 120%="#" of data riser copper pairs. C. Riser Fiber Cabling: For IDFs servicing fewer than seventy-five (75) outlets, twelve (12) tested optical fibers terminated in the BDF fiber patch panels shall be installed and to each of those IDFs servicing greater than seventy-five (75) outlets, twenty-four (24) tested optical fibers terminated in the BDF fiber patch panels shall be installed to each of those IDFs and terminated in the IDF. All optical fiber, terminations, and connections shall conform to the IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T specifications. The optical fiber cable provided under this paragraph will support future station "C" jacks. D. Riser Coaxial Cabling: A single RG-11 coaxial cable extending from the BDF to the top floor IDFs shall be installed and used as the riser for each IDF stack. E. "Kellums"- type basket hangers, or a University approved equal, shall be installed on all riser cables to provide independent support of cables passing through conduit sleeves installed in floor slabs. Hangers shall have a maximum separation of twelve (12) inches. 3.11 UNDERGROUND CABLING AND INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall install UTP underground copper cabling between the BDF (of the new facility and the MDF (located in the Patuxent Building) to support voice and data communications requirements (as specified in Part 2.04 of this Section). The underground cable shall run in the appropriate ductbank and manholes. The Contractor shall furnish and install an LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AQT&T Cable Rearrangement Facility Splice case (CRF) to match existing and locate the CRF in the location designated by the University. The Contractor shall terminate the underground cable in the cable vault of Building 010 in the LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Cable Rearrangement Facility (vertical splice case). The Contractor shall extend pairs from the CRF into the frame room of Building 010 and terminate pairs on Contractor provided 188B1 protector blocks (to be located on the frame in the location desigated by the University). The Contractor shall furnish and install new frame racks to support the protector units. The size of the copper underground cable shall be designated by the University. The Contractor shall use the largest size of cable applicable, and it shall be approved by the University prior to purchasing. B. Contractor shall install optical fiber backbone cabling between the BDF of the new facility and the MDF (located in 010, Patuxent Building) or the University designated Fiber Hub to support data communication requirements (as specified in Part 2.08 of this Section). The underground fiber shall run in innerliner (as specified in Part 2.19A of this Section) in the appropriate ductbank and manholes, as specified on the drawings, and terminated on Contractor provided LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Lightshelves. The size of the backbone optical fiber cable shall be a minimum of twelve (12) strands and shall be specified by the University. C. Contractor shall install coaxial backbone cabling between the BDF of the new facility and the MDF (located in the Patuxent Building) to support video communications requirements (as specified in Part 2.14 of this Section). The underground coaxial cable shall run in innerliner (as specified in Part 2.19A of this Section) in the appropriate ductbank and manholes. Cable in the manhole shall be secured to the manhole at least two (2) feet from the connection point and every four (4) feet thereafter. The connector shall be covered with a one (1) foot section of shrink tube except where the connector is located inside the building. Upon completion, the cable should show no sign of stretches, kinks, or compressions. If damage is apparent, new coaxial cable shall be pulled by the Contractor. 3.12 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, outlets shall be securely and neatly installed at the height specified in the following table: Standard Telephone Outlets: 1ft-6 inches Above Finished Floor (AFF) Wall Mounted Telephone Outlets: 4ft 6 inches AFF Wall Mounted for Head On Wheelchair Access: 4ft-0 inches AFF Service Counter Areas: 0ft-8 inches above counter work surface 3.13 DUCTBANK DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, AND UTILIZATION A. Contractor shall install XXXX pairs of multipair, UTP copper cable between the BDF and the Patuxent Building, Building 010. Prior to the termination of this cable in the Patuxent Building, Contractor shall verify its termination location with the University. B. Contractor shall install a XXXX strand optical fiber cable (as specified in Part 2.04 of this Section) between the BDF (of the new facility) and the Patuxent Building. Prior to termination of this cable in the Patuxent Building, Contractor shall verify its termination location with the University. C. Contractor shall install one (1) coaxial cable (as specified in Part 2.07B of this Section) between the BDF and the Patuxent Building. Prior to termination of this cable in the Patuxent Building, Contractor shall verify its termination location with the University. D. Optical fiber and coaxial cable in the specified amounts above shall be run in one and one quarter (1 1/4) inch innerducts, and copper cable shall be run in 1-1/2" innerducts. Two (2) one and one-quarter (1 1/4) inch and one (1) one and one-half (1 1/2) inch innerducts shall be installed in at least one (1) duct of each ductbank. Ductbank shall be engineered to accommodate the required twisted pair, fiber optic, and coaxial cable needs plus one hundred percent (100%) spare capacity. E. All ductbank shall conform to the provisions of Section 16300 and shall be arranged in a rectangular fashion. Only four (4) inch PVC "type B" conduit shall be used for communication ducts. No section of ductbank shall have more than a sum of 180 degrees of bends without the installation of a manhole. F. Ductbanks shall have a minimum of thirty (30) inches cover over encasement. There shall be twenty-four (24) inch minimum clearance between communications ductbank encasement and any other utilities. Note: NO EXCEPTIONS WILL BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE UNIVERSITY G. Concrete encased, galvanized intermediate weight rigid steel conduit shall be used instead of PVC or polypropylene wherever ductbanks cross roads, parking lots, or buried steam lines. Steel ducts shall extend ten (10) feet on either side of the crossing. At steam line crossings, encasement shall be covered with an aluminum reflector. H. All spare ducts or those with less than twenty-five percent (25%) fill shall have a one-quarter (1/4) inch polypropylene pull wire appropriately secured at each end. All vacant innerducts or those with less than twenty-five percent (25%) fill shall have a 3/16- inch polypropylene pull wire appropriately secured at each end. I. All ducts shall be pneumatically rodded using a University approved slug of one-quarter (1/4) inch diameter less than the duct inner diameter. J. All ducts, including spares, shall be sealed watertight with an expandable urethane foam at both ends. 3.14 MANHOLES A. Manholes shall have inside dimensions 6 feet wide x 12 feet 1 inch deep x 7 feet high (6'-0"W x 12'-1"D x 7'0"H) minimum. B. Manholes shall conform to the provisions of Section 16300. All steel equipment shall be hot dipped galvanized. All manholes shall have at least one (l), 7/8-inch diameter steel pulling eye in the wall opposite each duct entrance. Pulling eyes shall be welded to the reinforcing rods at the time of manhole fabrication. Each manhole shall be equipped with at minimum four (4) cable racks, two (2) per long side, that have adjustable hooks adequately sized to support the hardware. Manhole covers shall have the designation ""COMM"" cast on the cover. C. New ductbank shall be appropriately doweled to existing manholes. 3.15 CONNECTION TO EXISTING SYSTEM A. Splicing shall only be allowed in manholes or at building entrance locations. No splices shall be allowed in any other location in the new facility or in any ducts or innerliner. Splice cases in manholes shall be securely supported by support hooks on the cable racks not more than two (2) feet away from the splice case. Before closure, all splices shall be offered for inspection by the University and certification of workmanship by LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T. B. Contractor shall make all cross-connections in each IDF to connect three pairs of each voice and data UTP horizontal copper cable to the facility copper riser system. C. Contractor shall connect to University video network at the University's direction. 3.16 RE-ROUTING OF EXISTING UNDERGROUND CABLES A. Contractor shall re-route any voice, data, and video cables that are currently located in the space where the new facility is to be constructed to new or existing manholes. The re-routing and manhole locations are conspicuously identified on the site plan of the drawings. B. Contractor shall notify the University at least two (2) weeks in advance prior to any outage, re-routing any existing voice, data, and video cables. C. Any cable that is re-routed must be re-terminated and tested according to the termination and testing requirements as described in Part 3.19 of this Section. 3.17 VIDEO SYSTEM INSTALLATION BUILDING INTERIOR A. The Contractor shall provide video system design with loss calculation for University approval before the beginning of installation of any video system cable or equipment. B. Line extenders shall be mounted horizontally five (5) feet above finished floor using two (2) GB13b D-rings secured with eight (8), 1-3/16" screws. At least one (1) line extender must be provided for each IDF stack. Appropriate pads and equalizers shall be installed in the forward line extender section. Return line extenders pads and equalizers may be omitted. C. The first line extender in each IDF stack shall be located in the first floor IDF's. Depending on sign level requirements and the size of the building, additional line extenders in the higher floor IDFs may be required. D. All active and/or passive devices in an individual BDF or IDF shall be attached together using chassis to chassis or right angle connectors. E. Multiport taps shall be mounted vertically to one (1) GB13a D-ring, with a hex bolt (1/4" wide x 3/4" long) and secured to plywood with four (4) 1-3/16" screws. This does not apply to multiports attached to line extenders. F. The multiport tap, excluding those attached to line extenders shall face either left or right, but not outward into the BDF/IDF. All unused ports shall be terminated. G. An FFT8-29 multiport shall be the first device attached to the output side of the line extender and is to be used to read the signal levels and measure forward tilt. F- Type right angle connectors may be used for multiport wiring. H. Directional couplers and splitters shall only be used to connect the first amplifiers in the BDF/IDF stacks. I. All IDF/BDFs shall have at least one (l) multiport tap connected to the riser regardless if that IDF/BDF, services any outlets. At every IDF/BDF, a minimum of three (3) spare ports is required. J. In each IDF, the RG-11 coaxial station cable shall be secured to the existing plywood every two (2) feet with screw-type cable tie connectors. Station cable ends in the IDF/BDF shall clearly indicate the outlet and room number of the station end in indelible ink written on plastic cable tags. K. Connectors shall be chosen and installed so they can withstand thirty (30) pounds of pulling force without separating from the cable. 3.18 VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTING A. Contractor shall adjust amplifier gain and make other system adjustments to achieve specified output levels at each outlet. 3.19 CABLE PLANT LABELING A. All labeling shall be clear, securely affixed, and consistent on both ends of each installed cable. All labeling shall be approved in advance by the University. B. The labeling of outlet and IDF hardware shall be permanently engraved in the field by the Contractor according to the following numbering system: 1. Each outlet identification code shall consist of five (5) characters. 2. The first character shall indicate the floor of the building where the communications room serving the outlet is located. The number 0 (zero) shall be used for the ground floor, 1 (one) for the first floor, etc. The letter B shall be used for basements, S for sub-basements, and M, N, and P for mezzanines. 3. The second character shall be used for the communications room identifier. The letters A through Z (except I and O) shall be used and the University will specify the character to be used for each communications room. 4. The last three (3), characters shall denote the number of the outlet. Outlet numbers 1 through 9 shall be preceded with (2) zeros (e.g 004). Outlet numbers 10 through 99 shall be preceded with one (1) zero (e.g. 054). 5. Example: An outlet labeled 1A006 means first floor, IDF "A", outlet number 006. C. The five (5) character code for each outlet shall be permanently marked on the outlet, as well as on the corresponding IDF blocks. An outlet with an "A" and "B" outlet will have it's identification code appear on both cables at the outlet, as well as in the IDF on both the voice termination field and the data termination field. D. All unterminated optical fiber horizontal cabling shall be labeled at each end with the outlet number. E. All coaxial cable shall be labeled with an outlet number consistent with the closest voice/data communications outlet. F. All UTP copper riser and underground cable termination blocks shall be labeled with white 110 label strips and shall indicate pair count and destination closet. Voice and data riser shall be labeled separately. G. Underground cable protector units shall be labeled with green 110 label strips reflecting cable pair count and cable number. Underground cable in manholes shall be labeled with engraved brass tag showing cable number where entering and exiting manhole. H. All optical fiber riser and underground cable termination panels shall be labeled with fiber strand count and destination closet. The underground frame shall be labeled with the fiber strand count, fiber number, and fiber optic hub building number. Underground cable in manholes shall be labeled with engraved brass tag showing cable number where entering and existing manhole. I. All underground coaxial cable shall be labeled on each end with brass tag marked with the building number and designated as a coaxial feed cable. 3.20 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE A. Prior to acceptance, all "As-Built" and technical documentation shall be received and approved by the University. As-built documentation shall include the completed and notarized original copy of the LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimax Premises Distribution System Registration Document. All intrabuilding and interbuilding wiring and equipment, and all site restoration shall be installed and completed in accordance with University and industry standards. All wiring and equipment provided and/or installed under this Contract shall be tested as described under the terms of this Contract and shall be fully operational. After all work is complete, the Contractor shall also provide the University with LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimax Certification for all communications work completed on the project and AT&T Distribution Technologies certification for all outside plant splices. B. All copper cable plant testing shall diagnose, at a minimum, the presence of all open-loop conductors, noisy lines and distortion, low-loop current, high-loop current, ringer failures, grounded, shorted or crossed conductors, dB loss, and split connections. Contractor shall perform a continuity test on all pairs installed in the cable plant, both inside and outside the new facility. The testing shall cover end-to-end, from the outlet to the IDF and the BDF to the Patuxent Building. In addition, all tests described above shall be performed on a randomly selected pair per twenty-five (25) pair binder group of the copper riser cable. If this random selection is bad, additional testing shall be done to ensure that ninety-nine percent (99%) good pairs exist. The Contractor shall supply complete testing and correction reports to the University for review prior to acceptance of the system. The Contractor shall perform such additional testing as required to verify that pairs meet the transmission parameters required for 10BASE-T and Category 5 wiring specifications. The University shall have final approval on the format used for recording and reporting of test results prior to the start of testing activities. C. Horizontal Cable Testing All station cabling shall be tested to verify proper installation and termination. The following test shall be performed using a TIA/EIA TSB-67 compliant tester. * Continuity or wire map testing, consisting of: Open/short testing Polarity testing Pair transposition testing * Signal attenuation test. * Near-end crosstalk (NEXT). * DC loop resistance test. * Noise test. * Time domain reflectometer (TDR) measurement and other troubleshooting tests. D. Optical fiber cable testing shall, at a minimum, quantify the attenuation range, optical loss, bandwidth, and misalignment. The cable completion tests shall be performed after all optical fiber cable has been placed and all splicing completed. The Contractor shall terminate ten percent (10%) of all installed station fibers for testing purposes. The University will designate which fibers shall be terminated after all cables and wires have been pulled into place. All optical fibers shall be tested at both 850nm and 1300nm. For fibers terminated between the BDF and the Patuxent Building, testing shall include two-way testing using an Optical Time Domain Reflector (OTDR), and one-way testing using a Multimode Optical Loss Test Set (MOLTS). For optical fiber installation between the BDF and an IDF, the Contractor shall provide two-way loss testing through the use of MOLTS. Two-way MOLTS testing shall also be performed on station fiber terminated for testing purposes. All traces and results shall be provided to the University for approval. Protective covers shall be in place on all connectors when they are not in use to protect against contamination by dirt or dust. Any fiber found to be defective as a result of installation, physical inspection, or operational test shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. E. Coaxial cable and video signal testing shall be performed in the following manner to verify correct installation of coaxial cable and video system electronics: Input Signal @ 450 MHz Output Output@ch. 7 (after pad & equalizer) @450 MHz (175.2 MHz) 9 dbmv (± 1 dbmv) 43 dbmv 40 dbmv FFT8s Located in IDFs: 15 dbmv at 450 MHz at the output of all eight (8) ports of all FFT8s located in the new facility. 3.21 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION A. The Contractor shall provide the following outside plant wiring information, prior to acceptance of the building by the University, for each of the specified media: 1. Cable identification number (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 2. Cable design makeup (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 3. Cable lengths between splice points, terminations amplifiers, or line extenders (Copper, Fiber, and Coax) 4. Exact routing of cable (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 5. Splice location and identification (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 6. Strand count, mode of installed fiber, loss per splice in dB, and total amount of optical fibers installed (Fiber). 7. Frequency rating, location, and identification of amplifiers and splitters (Coax). 8. Bonding and grounding (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 9. Location and description of all associated equipment (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 10. Location and description of all associated structures and obstructions (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 11. Signal level readings at all line extenders, FFT8s, and all video outlets using frequencies 175.2 MHz (CH. 7) and 450 MHz. B. The Contractor shall provide the following intrabuilding wiring information on floppy disk, as well as, hard copy for each specified media prior to acceptance of the building by the University: 1. Cable entrance locations and penetration details (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 2. Location and identification of all distribution closets (IDF's and BDF) and of all equipment located inside distribution closets (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 3. Terminal information, outlet numbering, and pair count information at each distribution frame (Copper). 4. Schematic drawings of riser (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). 5. Routing of cable and termination information (Copper, Fiber, and Coax). C. The Contractor shall provide the following MDF wiring information prior to acceptance of the building by the University: 1. Cable pair assignments per connector block. 2. Identification of cable routing to MDF. D. The Contractor shall provide a complete listing of pair assignment records for copper wiring, optical fiber cabling, and coaxial cabling. Copper cable records shall include the status of each copper pair. Optical fiber cable records shall include strand allocation, test results, and identification of media and protocol used. E. The Contractor shall provide the University with the operational and maintenance documentation of all telecommunications equipment installed under the contract. F. As-Built drawings shall include actual locations of installed ductbank and manholes, including elevations, and shall indicate location, elevation, and type of service for all utilities crossed by the new ductbank. G. Contractor shall submit all drawings on 3.5-inch floppy diskettes utilizing AutoCAD 12. H. As-built documentation shall include the completed and notarized original copy of the LUCET TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimax Premises Distribtuion System Registration Document. The Contractor shall also provide the University with LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Systimex Certification for all communications work completed on the project and LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES INC./AT&T Distribution Technologies certification for all outside plant splices. 
16000 ELECTRICAL DESIGN SERVICES (2.15.97)


PART 1 - GENERAL

A.   The A/E shall provide all the technical, administrative and any
     and all other services requisite for a complete design.

     The purpose of this document is to provide the requirements for
     the design of those systems required or necessary to provide as
     per the Facility Program.

1.01 BASIC SERVICES.  The following services shall be included:

A.   Providing analyses of the Owner's needs, and programming the
     requirements of the Project.

B.   Providing services to investigate existing conditions or
     facilities or to make measured drawings thereof, or to verify
     the accuracy of drawings or other information furnished by the
     Owner.

C.   Providing interior and exterior design and other services
     required for or in connection with the selection, procurement
     execution and/or installation of related equipment.  All design
     shall be performed in accordance with latest editions of the
     Codes and Standards listed in the Facility Program and
     Electrical Design Services, the University of Maryland College
     Park Design Criteria & Facilities Standards (DCPS) manual and
     other applicable standards and codes.

D.   Preparing and providing all Drawings, Specifications and
     supporting calculations and data as specified in the Facility
     Program, DCFS, and this Design Services.

E.   Providing any other services not otherwise included in this
     Document which is customarily furnished in accordance with
     generally accepted Engineering practices.

1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS

A.   The ratings, characteristics, materials, design, construction
     and tests shall be in full accordance with the applicable
     standards, but shall not be limited to the latest edition of the
     following:

     1.   American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
     2.   Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
     3.   National electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA)
     4.   Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA)
     5.   National Electrical Code (NEC) 1990 Edition
     6.   American Standards Testing Materials (ASTM)
     7.   Illuminating Engineering Society (IES)
     8.   Insulated Cable Engineers Association(NFPA)
     9.   National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
     10.  National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
     11.  National Building Code (BOCA)
     12.  Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)
     13.  Lightning Protection Institute (LPI)
     14.  American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
          Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
     15.  Federal Information Processing Standards Publication (FIPS
          Pub. 94) "Guideline on Electrical Power for ADP
          Installations"

1.03 TIME

A.   The A/E shall perform Basic and Additional Services
     expeditiously with professional skill and care and preserve the
     orderly progress of the Work.

1.04 QUALITY OF WORK

A.   The A/E shall perform the Work in accordance with the Facility
     Program prepared in accordance with this document, and subject
     to, and in accordance with, generally accepted good Engineering
     practices.

B.   The following conditions and services are included in the Basic
     Services of this document and shall be a part of and/or more
     specifically catalog all those services listed in ARTICLE 1.01.

     1.   Investigation and consideration of data and information
          relevant to the proposed work.

     2.   Preparation of all design drawings.

     3.   Preparation of all design calculations.

     4.   Preparation of all technical specifications.

     5.   Preparation of all catalogs cuts showing all equipment
          data, dimensions, and weights of all equipment designed to.

C.   Preparing complete details for the installation and specifying
     of equipment and materials and methods.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.01 CONCRETE ENCASED DUCTBANKS

A.   Concrete encased (reinforced under roadways and parking areas)
     ductbanks shall be used for all underground electrical power and
     communication systems.  The top of the ductbank shall be minimum
     30 inches below the finished grade.  The size of the ductbanks
     shall be designed in accordance with latest edition of NEC,
     figure 310-1 and attached detail drawings.

B.   Sufficient ducts shall be provided so that after all cables are
     pulled, no duct has more than 40 percentage of its cross
     sectional area filled.  Spare ducts shall be provided on the
     following basis:

                              Spares         Total
          Ducts Required     For 15KV      For 15 KV

               1                1               2
               2                2               4
               3                3               6
               4                4               8

2.02 SWITCHGEAR AND TRANSFORMER FOR OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS

A.   15KV SYSTEM 

     1.   Medium voltage outdoor switchgear shall be metal enclosed
          and suitable for 15KV loop feeders.  The switchgear shall
          be S & C type PMU-19.

     2.   The pad mounted transformer shall be oil-filled and sized
          in accordance with the estimated connected and demand loads
          and shall be 13.2KV delta connected primary to 480Y/277
          volt, 3 phase, 4 wire secondary (minimum impedance 5.75%).

B.   All conductive components of the switchgear and transformer
     shall be copper.  Both switchgear and transformer shall be
     mounted on an exterior reinforced concrete pad.  The size of the
     pad shall be designed in accordance with equipment layout.  The
     pad shall have frost legs and 4" - 6" wide curbing filled with
     stones/gravel all around the pad, and shall be approved by UMCP,
     Department of Architecture, Engineering, & Construction (DAEC)

2.03 UNIT SUBSTATION FOR INDOOR INSTALLATIONS

A.   15KV SYSTEM 

     1.   All medium voltage switchgear shall be metal enclosed and
          suitable for 15KV loop feeders.


     2.   The transformer shall be sized in accordance with the
          estimated connected and demand loads and shall be 13.2KV
          delta connected primary to 480Y/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire,
          secondary (minimum impedance 5.75%).

     3.   The secondary distribution equipment shall be designed as
          per article 2.07 of Electrical Design Services.

     4.   All conductive components of the unit substation
          (switchgear, transformer, and secondary distribution
          equipment) shall be copper.  The unit substation
          (switchgear, transformer, and secondary distribution
          equipment) shall be mounted on interior reinforced concrete
          pads.  The size of the pad shall be designed in accordance
          with equipment layout.  The pad shall be approved by UMCP,
          DAEC.

2.04 TRANSFORMER SIZING

A.   The size of the transformer shall be calculated as follows:

          All connected loads in KVA

          Add expected load for any Alternate and/or future addition
          (in KVA)

          Total connected load = ______ (in KVA)

          Demand factor = ______ (in %)

          Demand Load = _____ (in KVA)

          Add 20% Spare capacity for future loads = _____ (in KVA)

2.05 GROUNDING GRID SYSTEM

A.   Provide for and show a grounding grid system which surrounds the
     building and which shall consist of no less than 3/4 inch dia.
     x 10 feet long copper encased steel ground rods and #4/0 AWG,
     bare stranded, tinned copper grounding conductors.  The grid
     design shall conform the latest edition of NESC, IEEE, ANSI,
     NEC, & LPI for building electrical system and lightning
     protection systems.

B.   Provide for and show a grounding grid system for the outdoor
     transformer and switch pad which shall consist of 3/4 inch dia.
     x 10 feet long copper encased steel ground rods and #4/0 AWG,
     bare stranded tinned copper grounding conductors.  The grid
     design shall conform to ANSI/IEEE Standard 80.

C.   The grounding grid shall be buried below frost line but in no
     case shall be buried less than 36 inches below grade.

2.06 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE

A.   15KV SYSTEM

     Provide for and show a loop configured medium voltage 15KV
     feeders (consisting of 3-1/c, 4/0 AWG, EPR, 133% insulated 15KV
     copper conductors and 1 #1/0 AWG bare stranded, tinned copper
     grounding conductor in each set of feeder).

B.   All feeders shall be provided from the existing electrical
     manhole as recommended by the Department of Physical Plant to
     the new medium voltage switchgear.  Indicate all cuttings and
     splices in the existing manholes.

C.   Pre-cast concrete manholes shall be provided as necessary to
     facilitate the installation and as required for pulling the
     conductors as per cable manufacturer's recommendations.  The
     manholes shall not be provided more than 400 feet apart.  Use
     campus standard manhole size (see standard details).

2.07 EXTERIOR COMMUNICATION CABLES & WIRES

A.   Communication cables for voice, data, and video system shall be
     extended from the facility of the manhole up to the new
     Communication Building (Building #010) Distribution Frame (MDF)
     via existing and new ductbanks.  All connections, splices, and
     terminations in building #010 and the new facility shall be
     provided for.

2.08 LOW VOLTAGE A.C. DISTRIBUTION

A.   The number and size of the feeder conductors, service
     conductors, and raceway, shall be sized according to the
     estimated connected, and demand loads, any alternates and/or
     future additions, plus 20 percent spare for future loads.

B.   The low voltage distribution shall be 480Y/277 volt and/or
     208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire with a solidly grounded neutral.

C.   Provide for and show a complete fully circuited building power
     wiring system including service equipment
     switchgear/switchboard, panelboards, transformers, disconnect
     switches (non-fused), motor starters, circuit breakers,
     receptacles, conduits, wires, boxes, and all those items
     requisite for a complete installed and operating system for the
     building including any alternates.  All conductive components
     shall be copper.

     1.   The service entrance equipment shall have main circuit
          breaker(s) rated at the short circuit current available at
          that location and shall be UL listed as Suitable for
          Service entrance.

     2.   Provide for, and show the use of, the University of
          Maryland Standard time of use/demand meter, ammeter, and
          voltmeter with selector switches.

     3.   All over-current protective devices shall be circuit
          breakers.  Switches and fuses shall not be acceptable.

     4.   Provide for and show at least one spare circuit breaker of
          each size of circuit breaker in the switchgear/switchboard. 
          In addition, the switchgear/switchboard shall have fully
          equipped spaces for one of each size of circuit breaker.

     5.   The switchgear/switchboard and all circuit breakers shall
          have ampere interrupting capacity equal to the short
          circuit current calculated.  The short circuit calculation
          shall be based upon the MVA contribution from the Utility
          company.

     6.   Provide surge protection for each phase at the main
          distribution panel(s).

D.   All panel boards shall have main circuit breakers.  Main lugs
     only panel boards and plug-in-type circuit breakers in the panel
     boards shall not be acceptable.  Series rated circuit breakers
     and panels shall not be acceptable for use and/or for
     coordination.

E.   The loading of each phase in all panels shall be balanced as
     much as possible; a 15 percent difference in loading between
     phases is permissible.

F.   Neutral shall be grounded at the separately derived sources,
     i.e. transformers, and shall be carried through-out the system. 
     Full size neutral wire shall be used for all feeders and branch
     circuits.  Dedicated neutral wire sized equal to the phase wire
     shall be provided in each circuit feeding micro/mini computer
     rooms and offices.  Sharing the neutral wire with other circuits
     is not permitted.  Panels feeding micro/mini computer rooms and
     offices shall be provided with neutrals sized at 200% of the
     phase.

G.   A separate, insulted grounding conductor (green) shall be
     provided in all the raceways for feeders and branch circuits. 
     The conduit system shall not be used for grounding in lieu of an
     equipment ground conductor.

H.   A separate isolated grounding conductor shall be provided in all
     raceways and panelboards for circuits requiring isolated
     grounds.  An isolated ground shall be the full size as the phase
     conductors, and shall be connected directly to the ground bus of
     the distribution transformer servicing the circuit, and further,
     shall be totally isolated from the distribution ground up to the
     point of the outlet.  All panel isolated ground bus' shall be
     isolated and insulated from the panel and panel equipment
     ground.

I.   Each area of the building shall have duplex receptacles.

J.   Provide for and show all receptacles in offices, conference
     rooms, classrooms, laboratories, etc., as per the requirements
     shown in the Facility Program.  Provide one (minimum) of the
     duplex receptacles to be within two feet of each
     telecommunication outlet (voice, data and video).  The counter
     top receptacles in laboratories within six feet of a sink shall
     be GFI type.

K.   Provide for and show all receptacles in all mechanical spaces;
     electrical spaces; rest rooms; and Housekeeping Zone Closets. 
     All restroom and Housekeeping Zone Closet receptacles shall be
     GFI type.  Provide GFI type, weatherproof receptacles on the
     exterior wall and roof.

     1.   The telephone closet shall be provided with two duplex
          receptacles.  Each receptacle shall be connected on a
          separate dedicated branch circuit.

     2.   No two or more GFI receptacles shall be connected in series
          where one protects any other downstream GFI location.

     3.   Corridor receptacles shall be located at 30'-0" intervals.

L.   The locations of the receptacles may change through the time of
     the design phase.  This shall be done at no additional cost to
     the University.

M.   For calculating the number of receptacles and load per branch
     circuit, there shall be no more than 8 receptacles on each
     circuit feeding restrooms, housekeeping closets, corridors, and
     electrical and mechanical rooms/closets.  In all other areas, if
     no requirement is given in the Facility Program, the number of
     receptacles per circuit shall be no more than 6.

N.   All general purpose receptacles shall be duplex, grounding type,
     rated for 20 amperes, 125 volts.  Special receptacles shall be
     as per the requirements shown elsewhere in the Facility Program.

O.   Panel board sizes and conductor sizes shall be designed by the
     A/E.

P.   Provide for and show all junction boxes, disconnect switches,
     and receptacles and all branch circuit wiring and raceways for
     all the equipment.  All the power to equipment shall be provided
     from the switchboard or panels which shall be located in
     electrical rooms.

Q.   Provide for and show all heating, ventilation, and air
     conditioning equipment with connections, starters, and/or
     disconnect switches as required and in accordance with the
     National Electrical Code.  Provide for and show all associated
     power and control wiring and raceway for a complete working
     system.

R.   Provide for and show all connections, starters and/or disconnect
     switches, power, and control wiring in accordance with National
     Electrical Code to the equipment specified in other sections of
     the documents.

S.   Provide the Electrical Room and Mechanical Room layouts at a
     scale of 1/4" = 1'-0".

T.   All wires for feeders, branch circuits, and control circuits
     shall be copper conductor, THHN/THWN, 600 volt insulation, rated
     at 75  C.  Use of wire smaller than #12 AWG for feeder and
     branch circuits, and #14 AWG for control circuits shall not be
     acceptable.  Feeder and branch circuit conductors larger than
     #10 AWG and all control circuit conductors shall be stranded.

U.   Minimum acceptable wiring for general 15 amp and 20 amp branch
     circuits shall be as follows:

               Home Run Length                  Wire  
          120 Volt       277 Volt               Size  

          0-60 ft        0-100 ft            #12 AWG
          61-100 ft      100-250 ft          #10 AWG
          101 & up       251 & up            # 8 AWG

V.   Site Work:  Show all removal and relocation of any existing
     poles and associated branch circuit wiring.

W.   Cable Tray may be used as a raceway only for video, audio, and
     telecommunications.  Electrical power circuits shall not utilize
     cable tray.

X.   120/208 bus duct shall not be used.

Y.   Use the appropriately specified "K" factor transformers for the
     application of the load specified (i.e. K4 used for General
     Loads; K13 used for personal computer (P.C.) Loads).  Refer to
     ANSI C57.110 for the appropriate classification and use.  All
     conductive components shall be copper.

Z.   Fire alarm system, security system, central control and
     monitoring system (CCMS), exit signs, emergency lighting,
     critical laboratory equipment, and critical mechanical equipment
     like sump pumps, pipe heater etc., shall be connected to the
     emergency power panels.  Do not combine branch circuits for exit
     signs with emergency fixtures (night lights).

2.09 LIGHTING SYSTEM

A.   Provide for and show a complete circuited lighting system
     (Interior and Exterior) including exit and emergency lighting,
     exterior security walkway, roadway and parking lighting, for the
     building including any alternates.

B.   Exterior lighting shall be controlled by a photocell; 7 days/24
     hours time clock; and hand-off-automatic switch (HOA switch) and
     shall operate in such a manner that the photo-cell shall turn 
     the lights "ON" at sunset, time-clock shall turn the light "OFF"
     at a pre-set time and HOA switch shall have the manual override
     capability to turn the lights "ON" and "OFF" as needed.  Use
     campus standard fixtures for exterior lighting.

C.   Provide for lighting fixtures and desired footcandles.  The A/E
     shall design the lighting layout to meet the minimum average
     maintained footcandles and shall be uniform throughout the space
     designed for.

     1.   The average uniform maintained footcandles for the
          different areas shall be as follows:

          Classroom (General)           50 footcandles
          Computer Room                 50 footcandles
          Conference Room               50 footcandles switchable to 
                                           30 footcandles
          Copier/Supply room            30 footcandles
          Corridor/Stairway             20 footcandles
          Housekeeper Zone Closet       30 footcandles
          Mechanical/Electrical
           Equipment Room/Closet        30 footcandles
          Office                        50 footcandles with task    
                                           lighting
                                        70 footcandles without task 
                                           lighting
          Restroom                      30 footcandles
          Seminar Room/Lecture Hall     50 footcandles switchable to 
                                           30 footcandles
          Storage                       20 footcandles
          Telecommunication Closet      50 footcandles
          Outdoor Lighting              1.5 footcandles

          All other spaces (not listed above) shall have illumination
          levels in accordance with Illuminating Engineering Society
          (IES) recommendations.

     2.   Fluorescent fixtures shall be used for general interior
          lighting.  The light fixtures shall be 2'X4', 2, 30 or 4
          lamp as required by the lighting design, recessed in
          finished areas.  Fluorescent light fixtures for general
          lighting shall be provided with 3/16" virgin acrylic lens. 
          Fluorescent light fixtures in computer rooms, workstation
          areas, and related laboratories shall be provided with 18
          cell, 4" deep, pre-anodized aluminum parabolic louvers with
          low-iridescent, semi-specular silver finish.  Two tube,
          industrial type fluorescent fixtures with reflectors and
          shatter proof shields or sheaths for the lamps shall be
          used in unfinished areas like Telecommunication
          Room/Closet, Electrical and Mechanical Equipment
          Room/Closet.  The Electrical Room/Closet light fixtures
          shall be connected to emergency power panel via wall
          switch.  Provide emergency lighting in mechanical rooms.

     3.   The coefficient of utilization of the fluorescent fixtures
          selected shall be 0.65 (0.62 for parabolic) or higher at
          room cavity ratio of 2 with ceiling-wall-floor reflectance
          of 70-50-20 percent.  For fluorescent fixtures, a light
          loss factor of 0.65 shall be used in calculating the number
          of fixtures.

     4.   In general purpose classroom, seminar room, and lecture
          hall, the fluorescent light fixtures shall be zoned to
          allow front lights and house lights to be controlled
          separately.  Chalkboard lighting shall be provided on
          separate switch at the front of the room.

     5.   In conference rooms with dividers, the light fixtures on
          each half shall be controlled independent of the other.

     6.   All corridors, public areas and rooms shall be switched
          from one access point except that two/three way switches
          shall be provided when access points are more than 15 feet
          apart, or rooms have more than one door.

     7.   All fluorescent light fixtures shall use low wattage, high
          power factor, high-frequency, electronic ballasts suitable
          for T8 lamps.  The total harmonic distortion shall be less
          than 20%.  The ballasts shall be as manufactured by
          MagneTek triad L type or approved equal.  For maximum
          energy efficiency, use tandem wired fixtures.

     8.   The fluorescent lamps shall be 32 watt, energy saving, cool
          white, rapid start, type T8, with color rendering index of
          70 and suitable for operation on electronic ballasts, as
          manufactured by Philips, Sylvania, or General Electric.

     9.   Use reflectors in all fluorescent fixtures to reduce
          wattage and lamps required in all areas where possible.

D.   The use of incandescent lamps shall be reduced to a minimum. 
     Use compact fluorescent lamp with reusable ballast in
     supplementary task and downlighting.

E.   Where applicableprovide for and show the relocation of any
     existing exterior poles and new fixtures; branch circuit wiring
     etc. for a complete working system.

F.   All lighting fixtures shall use high power factor and energy
     saving ballasts and energy saving lamps.

G.   All life safety lighting fixtures (the number of exit signs and
     emergency light fixtures) shall be as required by NFPA 101.  The
     exit signs shall be light emitting diode type (LED).  For
     College Park Campus, the exit sign shall be Dual-lite Excalibur
     LED series or approved equal.  Exit signs with integral battery
     pack is not acceptable for use on College Park Campus.  

H.   Provide a convenient means to re-lamp, clean, repair or replace
     lighting fixtures in inaccessible or hazardous locations.

2.10 WIRING FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES, RECEPTACLES

A.   For lighting fixture applications, the use of MC cable shall
     only be allowed for connections from a junction box to a
     lighting fixture.  The MC Cable shall not be more than 6 feet in
     length.  The use of MC cable from lighting fixture to lighting
     fixture shall not be allowed (except between the fixtures in a
     tandem wired group).

B.   For receptacle applications, the use of MC cable shall only be
     allowed from a junction box to only those receptacles located
     within the same room.

C.   The use of MC cable shall not be allowed to cross between one
     room to another room whether or not the wall between the two
     rooms extends up to the slab.

D.   The use of MC cable shall not be used between two rooms if the
     rooms are identified as two separate rooms or not.

E.   Back-to-back receptacles shall not be accepted.

F.   MC cable shall not be used between two receptacles when they are
     in two separate rooms but are on the same wall.

2.11 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

A.   Provide for and show a complete voice, data, and fibre system
     including all jacks, plates, terminations, terminal boards
     and/or cabinets, equipments, associated wiring and raceways for
     the building including any alternates for a complete working
     system.

B.   Provide for and show a complete video system including all
     jacks, plates, terminating resistors, cabinets, extenders,
     splitters, attenuator pads, amplifiers, power supplies,
     associated wiring and raceway for the building including any
     alternates for a complete working system.

C.   Each space shall have voice and data outlets, video outlets
     (where identified), jacks, plates, and all associated wiring
     (twisted pair copper for voice and data along with unterminated
     fiber pair, and coaxial cable for video) and raceway.  The
     number of outlets shall be as per the requirements shown in the
     Facility Program.  If requirements are not provided, the number
     of outlets shall be as per UMCP General Telecommunications
     Premise Distribution System Specification.

D.   The locations of these outlets may change throughout the time of
     the design phase.  This shall be done at no additional cost to
     the University.

E.   Provide for and show all emergency phone outlets with blue
     lights (120V) at the exterior perimeter and/or all egress from
     the facility.

F.   Provide for and show a minimum of one voice outlet in all of the
     mechanical and electrical spaces.  Provide for and show one
     curtesy/emergency phone outlet per 5,000 NASF, one elevator
     phone per elevator, pay telephone at building entrances and
     public spaces.

G.   The telecommunications closets shall be provided with office
     grade HVAC (ambient temperature 68 F to 72 F).

H.   Provide for and show the cables for voice, data, (copper and
     fiber) and video systems from the building to the
     telecommunications switch building via existing and/or new
     ductbanks and manholes.

I.   The communication system shall be designed in accordance with
     University standards and specifications.  The design for the
     communication system shall be approved by the University of
     Maryland, Department of Communication and Business Services.

2.12 FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM (FADS)

A.   Provide for and show a complete Fire alarm and Smoke Detection
     System (FADS) including all system devices; wiring; raceway;
     control panel; annunciator panel; etc. for the building
     including any Alternates.  The FADS system shall be coordinated
     with the sprinkler system and the security system.

B.   The FADS system shall be a Multiplex system and shall be in
     accordance with University of Maryland standards set forth in
     the DCFS and shall be approved by the University of Maryland
     Fire Marshal.

C.   The size of the FADS system shall be calculated by the A/E based
     upon the connected load (including any alternate) plus 20% space
     capacity for future expansion.

2.13 GENERATOR SYSTEM

A.   Provide for and show a generator set with automatic transfer
     switch, manual by-pass, start/stop control system, remote alarm
     annunciator, battery charger, and other accessories for a
     complete working system.

B.   The size of the generator set shall be calculated by the A/E
     based upon the connected load including any Alternate plus 20
     percent spare capacity for future expansion.

2.14 SECURITY SYSTEM

A.   Provide for and show a complete operational security system
     consisting of intrusion detection system, windows monitor
     system, access control systems and all other hardware and
     accessories for the building including any alternates.

B.   The security system shall be sized and calculated by the A/E
     based upon the connected load including Alternate plus 20% space
     capacity for future expansion.

2.15 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (UPS)

A.   Provide for and show a complete UPS system consisting of
     rectifier/battery charger, battery, transistorized invertor,
     static transfer switch, input and output breakers, internal
     bypass switch, external maintenance bypass cabinet (with minimum
     two non-automatic circuit breakers) with key interlock scheme
     (to prevent interruption of power to the load during transfer or
     re-transfer, only one breaker shall be in the open position at
     all times),  local and remote annunciator panels, emergency
     power off switches, input filter with power factor correction,
     air conditioning system, and any other hardware and accessories
     required for the installation including any alternates. 

2.16 COMPUTER ROOMS/TELECOMMUNICATION SWITCH ROOM RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM

A.   The raised floor system shall consist of bolted down stringer
     frame with pressure type spring washers or spring in the
     assembly, floor panels, pedestals, electrostatic ground
     connectors, and accessories.  The raised floor supporting
     structure shall be suitable for use as signal reference grid. 
     Connections between data processing equipment ground and the
     signal reference grid shall be made using flexible flat braided
     copper straps, to provide minimum impedance at high frequency. 
     The design shall be compatible with the grounding concepts
     described in Federal Information Processing Standards
     Publication 94.  Provide details of typical ground connections
     to the pedestal, transient suppression plates, and central
     grounding point.

B.   Power and communication distribution for work stations and
     monitoring stations shall be made using access floor
     distribution boxes and coordinated with the raised floor
     systems.

C.   An under-floor water detection system shall be used at all HVAC
     units, piping locations, and at any other points of potential
     source of water intrusion into the under-floor space.

D.   Emergency Power Off (EPO) push button (heavy duty) shall be
     provided at the exit doors.  The push button, on activation,
     shall cause all power supply to be disconnected from the
     respective loads in the room.  The push button shall be
     protected by a full ring guard to prevent unintentional shut
     down.  The push button and controls shall derive power from all
     three phases.  The controls shall be housed in the EPO cabinet. 
     The activation of the EPO system shall be annunciated at the EPO
     cabinet.  Provide the capability for remote activation and
     annunciation.

2.17 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

A.   Lightning Protection.  Lightning protection should be evaluated
     in accordance with NFPA 78.  Buildings in the "moderate to
     severe" category of exposure and higher should be equipped with
     a UL listed lightning protection system.  The system should be
     carefully designed to ensure that static discharges are provided
     with an adequate path to ground.  Surge arresters on the main
     electrical service should also be considered.

2.18 EQUIPMENT MAINTAINABILITY

A.   Equipment shall be designed for ease of field erections and
     field maintenance.  It must be warranted to perform to all
     specifications with minimum of field maintenance.  Equipment
     must be void of safety hazards to authorized operating personnel
     and the general public.

B.   All routine service adjustments must be readily accessible
     without removing the equipment from service.  They may be
     located either on an outside panel or behind covers that can be
     opened or removed without the use of tools.

PART 3 - DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

3.01 DESIGN CALCULATIONS

A.   Design calculations and data sheets shall be set out in a
     systematic manner to enable an accurate assessment of the
     equipment/system proposed.  Initial design calculations shall be
     submitted at the design development stage.  Revised calculations
     shall be submitted at 50% and 95% construction documents stages. 
     Complete final calculations shall be submitted at 100%
     construction document stage.  All calculations shall be
     presented on applicable forms and all literature used in the
     determination of the calculations shall be referenced.  These
     calculations shall include, but not be limited to:

     1.   Short circuit calculations using ohmic or per-unit method
          (refer to IEEE Trans. Vol 1AG-3, No.2, Mar/Apr 1967) for
          the entire electrical system including all panelboards (480
          volt as well as 208 volts panels), and switchboards,
          considering the motor contributions.

     2.   All feeder voltage drop calculations, including short time
          drops (dips) caused by large motor starting to assure that
          resulting light flicker is within acceptable limits.

     3.   Lighting budget calculations and shall comply with ASHRAE
          90 and performed for the entire facility.

     4.   Lighting level calculations shall comply with IES and be
          performed for all areas by using zonal cavity method.  Also
          submit point-to-point calculations for outside lighting
          such as security and parking and open-bay areas inside the
          building.  The power requirement for lighting shall not
          exceed the budget calculations per article 3.01.A.3.

     5.   Power factor correction required for each and/or all of the
          motor loads, and provide the sizes of all such devices and
          locations.

     6.   Identify the demand factor used for each type of load for
          estimating the service size.  Also, identify the connected
          load and the demand loads.

     7.   Load analysis of all equipment connected to emergency
          generator.  All loads connected shall be considered
          continuous.

     8.   Lightning protection shall be evaluated for a risk
          assessment and calculations showing ground requirements for
          the system.  Identify and calculate the zones of protection
          and show the total envelope of protection to be covered by
          the system.

     9.   Outdoor transformer and switch pad grounding grid
          calculation as per ANSI/IEEE 80.

B.   COMPUTER CALCULATION.  When computer calculations are included
     with design calculations the following documentation shall be
     furnished as a minimum:

     1.   A synopsis of the computer program(s) stating briefly;
          required input; method of solution; approximations used;
          second order analysis incorporated; specifications or codes
          used; cases considered; output generated; extent of
          previous usage or certification of program(s) and
          program(s) author.

     2.   Identification by number, indexing, and cross referencing
          of all calculation sheets, including supplemental "long-hand" calculation sheet.

     3.   Fully identified, dimensioned, and annotated diagrams of
          each member or structure being considered.

3.02 CATALOGUE CUTS

a.   Submit with the 50%, 95% and 100% CD submissions, the catalog
     cuts for all equipment, including but not limited to outdoor
     switchgear, distribution transformer, switchboards, panelboards,
     disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers, dry type
     transformers, light fixtures, etc. used in the design.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS

A.   The A/E shall prepare and submit for review and approval all
     drawings at 30%, 50%, 95% and 100%.

B.   Construction drawings shall be prepared by the A/E and convey to
     the Contractor all information necessary for accomplishing the
     required work.  Drawings shall be accurate and explicit.

C.   All elements of the Work shall be properly coordinated to insure
     that there are no conflicts between disciplines and
     specifications.

D.   All construction drawings prepared by the Engineer shall be
     signed by the designer, the checker (checker shall not be the
     same person), and then approved by the Lead Engineer.  Project
     specifications shall be signed on the cover sheet in a similar
     manner.

E.   In general, abbreviations should be avoided except those which
     are generally understood and accepted and listed in the legend
     and symbols list.

F.   Uppercase lettering shall be used for both freehand or CAD
     generated drawings.  Minimum allowable height of letters is 1/8
     inch.

G.   North arrow shall be placed on all physical layouts and located
     on the upper left hand corner of the drawing.

H.   General notes for a set of drawings covering one particular type
     of work are placed on the 1st sheet of the set.

I.   General notes that are specification-type in nature shall not be
     placed on drawings, but shall be incorporated into the
     appropriate category of the specifications.

J.   Bid drawings shall be based on University of Maryland,
     Department of Engineering, Architecture & Construction
     Electrical Standards.  The drawings shall be prepared to give
     sufficient information for them to be used by a Contractor as
     the site working drawings; they shall be of uniform size. The
     drawings shall be numbered in accordance with this Document.

K.   Use University of Maryland Standard format for panelboard
     schedules, motor control schedules, lighting fixture schedules,
     transformer schedule, and switchboard schedule.  A sample of
     each schedule is attached at the end of this document, and are
     marked as Attachments A through G.

3.04 GENERAL RULES FOR DRAWING REFERENCES

A.   Each project drawing package shall be in sequential order of
     discipline.  Electrical drawings consist of a letter and
     followed by a sequential number identified below by "XX".  All
     areas of electrical design shall be laid out so as to be grouped
     by type of information contained; type of work; systems; and
     details.  The following is an explanation of the above for the
     description of each type drawing.

B.   Demolition shall not be shown on the same drawing(s) with new
     work.  Demolition drawing(s) shall receive a number reflecting
     its disciplinary area as outlined in the following drawing
     listing in an appropriate sequential order.

Drawing #  Description

E-"XX"    General.  This drawing shall contain all General Project
          notes; Legend; Drawing List; symbols; and abbreviations
          used.

E-"XX"    Site Plan.  This drawing shall contain all Utilities and
          Outdoor Lighting.

E-"XX"    Power and Telecommunication Layout.  This drawing shall
          contain all receptacles, equipment, and telecommunication
          outlet locations and shall be fully circuited.  The numbers
          will follow sequentially for all Power and
          Telecommunication Layout drawings as necessary.

E-"XX"    Special Systems Layout.  This drawing shall contain all
          special system equipment, outlets, and devices locations
          and shall be fully circuited.  The numbers will follow
          sequentially for all Special System Layout drawings as
          necessary.

E-"XX"    Lighting and FAS Layout.  This drawing shall contain all
          lighting fixtures, switches, emergency lighting, and Fire
          Alarm System and device locations and shall be fully
          circuited.  The numbers will follow sequentially for all
          layout drawings as necessary.

E-"XX"    Riser Diagrams (Electric). This drawing shall contain all
          those electrical distribution elements of the facility. 
          All items shall be identified in detail (ie: conduit sizes,
          cable sizes, cable quantities contained in conduits, panel
          identification (name tags), panel sizes (ie: 100 A),
          transformer identification (name tags), transformer sizes
          (ie: 25 kva), transformer voltages, transformer impedances,
          and any other identification of electrical equipment in the
          distribution of the facility. The numbers will follow
          sequentially for all riser diagram drawings as necessary.

E-"XX"    Riser Diagram & Elevation Drawings for Telecommunication
          System:  This drawing shall contain and identify all voice,
          data, fiber, and video outlets, the station wiring, riser
          counts to form BDF to IDF(s), closets, active components
          and their location, elevation diagrams of BDF & IDF'(s)
          etc, for the system.

E-"XX"    Riser Diagram for Fire Alarm, Smoke Detection and Special
          Systems.  This drawing shall contain and identify all the
          devices, raceways, conductors, etc. for the riser diagram.

E-"XX"    One line Diagrams & Front Views.  This drawing shall
          contain all those electrical distribution elements of the
          facility.  All items shall be identified in detail (ie:
          conduit sizes, cable sizes, cable quantities contained in
          conduits, panel identification (name tags), panel sizes
          (ie: 100 A), transformer identification (name tags),
          transformer sizes (ie: 25 kva), transformer voltages,
          transformer impedances, and any other identification of
          electrical equipment in the distribution of the facility. 
          Front views of all switchboards, motor control centers,
          unit substations etc., shall be shown with all dimensional
          data and shall coordinate with device locations identified
          in the one-line diagram.  The numbers will follow
          sequentially for all one-line diagrams and front view
          drawings as necessary.

E-"XX"    Lighting Fixture and Special System Schedules.  This
          drawing shall contain all those schedules for lighting.  
          The numbers shall follow sequentially for all lighting
          fixture schedule and special system panel schedule drawings
          as necessary.

E-"XX"    Panel Schedules.  This drawing shall contain all those
          schedules for power distribution transformer, panelboard,
          switchboard, and motor control center only. Sample
          schedules are attached.  Any other schedules to be used for
          the design and incorporated in the drawings shall first be
          with the approval of the University.  The numbers will
          follow sequentially for all panel schedule drawings as
          necessary.

E-"XX"    Installation Details.  This drawing shall contain all
          details for mounting, bolting, conduit connections and
          routing, or any type of detail required for the
          clarification of the installation of any portion of the
          electrical design and shall coordinate with the drawing
          set.  All details shall be organized as to the type of
          electrical work involved and shall be grouped together (ie:
          all lighting details together, all power distribution
          details together, all grounding details, together, etc..). 
          Sample details are attached.  The numbers will follow
          sequentially for all installation detail drawings as
          necessary.  

E-"XX"    Grounding Layout.  This drawing shall contain all
          information and a complete layout of grounding systems. 
          The numbers will follow sequentially for all grounding
          layout drawings as necessary.

E-"XX"    Manhole & Ductbank Profiles.  This drawing shall contain
          all information and a complete profile for all manhole and
          ductbank installations for both electrical and
          telecommunication systems.  The numbers will follow
          sequentially for all profile drawings as necessary.

3.05 SPECIFICATIONS

A.   The A/E shall prepare and submit for review and approval all
     specifications for all aspects of the work, all equipment, and
     materials for the procurement, installation, and execution of
     the work requisite for the complete operable installation.

B.   Specifications shall adequately describe the various sections of
     the installation work and be consistent with the information
     given within the A/E drawings.

C.   Specifications shall be prepared in accordance with Construction
     Specification Institute (CSI) format and shall comply with the
     latest editions of all applicable codes.

D.   Specified materials and equipment shall comply with the
     appropriate U.S. standards, specifications, and Codes of
     Practice where such apply.  Equivalent types of materials may be
     accepted subject to approval by the University.



SECTION 16010  GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

     A.   The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
          equipment, tools, and services necessary for and incidental
          to the furnishing and completing the installation of all
          electrical work, including the installation of conduits,
          wires, boxes, devices, etc., as shown on the Contract
          drawings and/or called for in the specifications, and
          deliver it to the University in proper working condition.

     B.   The specifications and drawings outline, in general manner,
          the work required of the Contractor.  The Contractor is
          responsible for work which may be interpreted from the
          specifications and drawings as necessary for a complete
          installation ready for service.  The words "install" or
          "installation" shall be interpreted as the inclusion of the
          following work:

          1.   Handling, setting, plumbing, aligning, and anchoring
               of equipment on foundations or their final installed
               locations.

          2.   Placing all expansion anchors, mounting bolts, base
               channels, cable clamps and supports, floor plates,
               cable, and conduit fittings required at the equipment.

          3.   Mounting and connecting of electrical items shipped
               separately and removing and replacing equipment parts
               to facilitate handling.

          4.   Making internal connections on equipment which were
               omitted for shipment.  Provision of jumpers and local
               temporary interconnections that may not be listed in
               the cable tabulations, at no additional cost to the
               University.

          5.   Cleaning and checking of electrical equipment and
               connections.

          6.   Repair to damaged surfaces, equipment or building
               (existing for new) shall be made to the satisfaction
               of the University or their designated representative
               at no additional cost to the University.

     C.   The Contractor shall protect work in progress from physical
          damage and against the intrusion of dirt.  The work area
          shall be kept clear of debris to prevent interferences with
          the facility operation.

     D.   Suitable warning and/or protection shall be provided around
          temporary openings, open manholes, removed sections of
          gratings, exposed high voltage equipment or other hazardous
          areas and conditions.

1.02 CODES, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS

     A.   The Contractor shall give all necessary notices and obtain
          all required permits, pay all fees and other cost,
          including utility connections or extensions in connection
          with the work; file all necessary plans, prepare all
          documents, and obtain all necessary permits and approvals
          from all governmental agencies having jurisdiction; and
          obtain all required certificates of inspection and deliver
          same to the University before request for acceptance and
          payment for the work.

     B.   All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply
          with the latest issue of the codes, rules, regulations, and
          recommendations of the following bodies, unless otherwise
          specifically noted:

          1.   American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
          2.   American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
          3.   Insulated Cable Engineer Association (ICEA)
          4.   National Electrical Code (NEC)
          5.   National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
          6.   National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
          7.   Occupational Safety and Health Agency (OSHA)
          8.   Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
          9.   National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
          10.  Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
               (IEEE)
          11.  Basic Building Code (BOCA)
          12.  Illuminating Engineer's Society (IES)
          13.  Lightning Protection Institute (LPI)

1.03 SUBMITTALS:  TEST DATA

     A.   Submit name of testing agencies for approval within 30 days
          after award of contract.

     B.   Submit test reports to the University under provisions of
          the General Conditions.  Submit test reports within 15 days
          of the completion of required tests.  Test reports shall
          include, but not be limited to, the following information:

          1.   Testing Company name, address, phone number.  Project
               description.  Contractor names.

          2.   Instrument list, including manufacturer, model number,
               serial number, range, calibration date.

          3.   Description of equipment tested including
               manufacturer, model number, serial number, design
               ratings and limits, installation location.

          4.   Test information hereinafter specified in the
               appropriate Division 16 Section.

     C.   Provide five copies of test reports in soft cover, letter
          size, 3-ring binder manuals with cover identification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

     A.   All materials and equipment shall be new, shall be suitable
          for the conditions and use imposed on them, and shall carry
          a U.L. label required for their intended use when such
          material, equipment, and/or systems are of a type or class
          listed by Underwriter Laboratories, Inc. All data
          indicating compliance with standards prior to installation
          shall be submitted.  The description, characteristics, and
          requirements of materials to be used shall be in accordance
          with qualifying conditions established in the following
          sections.

     B.   All component parts of each item of equipment or device
          shall bear the manufacturers' name plate, giving the name
          of manufacturer, description, size type, serial or model
          number, electrical characteristics, etc., in order to
          facilitate the maintenance or replacement.  The name plate
          of a subcontractor or distributor is not acceptable.

     C.   In specifying materials, three general procedures are used. 
          The three classifications are as follows:

          1.   Group 1:  When material or equipment is specified by
               name or other identifying information and one name
               brand only is used, it is considered that the use of
               that particular item is essential to the project, and
               the Contractor shall base his proposal on the cost of
               that item.  When any materials or equipment are
               specified by proprietary name, trade name, or
               manufacturer, it is considered that the items named,
               are intended to be used.

          2.   Group 2:  When the material or equipment is specified
               with the phrase "... or approved equal ..." after a
               brand name and other identifying information it is
               intended that the brand name is for the purpose of
               establishing a minimum acceptable standard of quality
               and performance and the Contractor may base his bid
               proposal on any item which is in all respects equal to
               or better than that specified and essentially would be
               the same in appearance, in size, in operation, in
               performance, and will fit in the available space.

          3.   Group 3:  When material is specified as complying with
               the requirements of a published "Standard
               Specification" of a trade association such as, ANSI,
               ASTM, government specifications, etc., the contractor
               shall base his proposal on any item which can be shown
               to comply in all respects with the referred "Standard
               Specification." 

     D.   It is distinctly understood:  (1) that the University or
          their designated representative will use their own judgment
          in determining whether or not any materials, equipment or
          methods offered for approval as an equal are in fact equal
          to those specified and will fit the space available; (2)
          that the decision of the University on all such questions
          of equality is final; and (3) all acceptable material,
          equipment or methods will be provided at no increase in
          cost to the University.

     E.   Upon receipt of written notice from the University or their
          designated representative that the material, equipment, or
          methods have been reviewed and accepted (with no exceptions
          taken or comments as noted thereon), the Contractor may
          proceed with the accepted equal material, equipment, or
          methods.  The Contractor shall assume full responsibility
          for and performance of any change or adjustment in the
          construction that may be required by the use of such
          materials, equipment, or methods.  This shall include but
          not limited to the services provided under other divisions
          and shall be solely at the contractors expense.

     F.   In the event of any adverse decisions by the University or
          their designated representative, no claim of any sort shall
          be made or allowed against the designated representative
          for the University.

2.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, FOUNDATIONS AND STANDS

     The Contractor shall provide all supports, foundations, and
     stands required for the complete installation of the electrical
     equipment and further shall provide, align, and set all
     necessary anchor bolts.

2.03 NAMEPLATES

     All switchgear, transformers, motor control centers, UPS,
     generator, instrumentation, and devices shall be provided with
     engraved laminated black and white phenolic nameplates with
     beveled trim.  Data and installation shall be approved by the
     University or their designated representative.  Nameplate
     lettering shall be minimum 1/4 inch high etched letters.  All
     nameplates shall be fastened with screws without altering the
     NEMA classification of the enclosure.

2.04 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS

     Electrical equipment indicated on plans by symbols shall be
     taken to mean a complete installed device, including all those
     items as may be required to be installed by the NEC, or any
     other code or standard referenced and made a part of herein.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION OF WORK

     A.   The contractor shall have a competent foreman on the
          premises at all times to check, layout, and supervise the
          installation of the work shown on the drawings and
          described in the following specifications.  The foreman
          shall layout and supervise the installation of all manholes
          and ductbank and equipment in advance of and during
          construction, giving consideration to other trades to
          prevent interference in the location of other equipment.

     B.   Exact locations of electrical equipment including, but not
          limited to, duct and manholes shall be coordinated with all
          other existing underground utilities.  Where conflicts
          result they shall be resolved by the Contractor to the
          satisfaction of the University or their designated
          representative at no expense to the University.

3.02 OUTAGES

     A.   The Contractor shall perform all work with a minimum of
          electrical outages.

     B.   All outages schedules shall be submitted in writing to the
          University's Department of Architecture, Engineering and
          Construction to the attention of the designated
          representative at least fifteen (15) working days prior to
          the scheduled outage.  Outages shall be scheduled on
          weekends only.

     C.   Any losses caused by non-coordinated or unscheduled outages
          shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and such
          losses shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.

     D.   All outages shall be approved by the University's
          Department of Architecture, Engineering and Construction
          and shall be scheduled at the convenience of the
          University, which shall be during other than normal work
          time.  Any cost to the Contractor for overtime pay to
          Contractor's employees shall be included in the original
          proposal price. 

     E.   The Contractor shall be fully prepared to perform all
          scheduled outages in the specific time requested and
          accepted by the University.

     F.   The University reserves the right to cancel any outage
          requests, at its sole discretion, at no cost to the
          University.

3.03 WORKMANSHIP

     A.   Workmanship shall be of the highest quality in the trade
          working with the materials specified.  Workmanship shall be
          satisfactory to the Owner or his designated representative
          and his decision as to acceptable quality is final.

     B.   All work shall be performed by skilled electricians and
          mechanics in all the trades involved.

3.04 OVERTIME

     Any work required to be performed at other than normal working
     hours (nights, holidays, weekends, etc.) shall be taken into
     consideration by the Contractor in the proposal price.  Extra
     compensation shall not be allowed to the Contractor for any work
     performed at other than normal working hours.

3.05 PLACING IN SERVICE

     Upon completion of the work, the systems and the equipment shall
     be carefully tested by the Contractor for completeness and
     correctness of the installation, actual operation, and that all
     the various pieces of equipment are made to function as
     intended.

3.06 HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

     A.   The provisions of Section 01600 shall apply.

     B.   Electrical conduit shall be stored so as to provide
          protection from the weather and accidental damage.  Plastic
          conduit shall be stored on even supports and in locations
          not subject to direct sun rays or excessive heat.

     C.   Cables shall be sealed, stored, and handled carefully to
          avoid damage to the outer covering or insulation and damage
          from moisture and weather.

3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

     A.   All equipment requiring electrical service shall be
          installed and connected in accordance with the best
          engineering practice and in accordance with the
          manufacturers recommendations.

     B.   Equipment connections indicated on drawings shall be
          considered diagrammatic.  The actual connections shall be
          made to best suit the requirements of each case and to
          minimize the space used.

3.08 WATERPROOFING

     A.   All waterproofing and dampproofing of any building shall be
          held unharmed by the installation of work under this
          division.  Whereever any of the work or conduits under this
          division pierce waterproofing and dampproofing, including
          outside walls, such penetrations shall be made only when
          approved by the University or their designated
          representative and the pierced surface shall be made
          watertight.  Any waterproofing damaged or destroyed shall
          be replaced at the Contractor's expense.

3.09 CUTTING, PATCHING AND PAINTING

     A.   All cutting, patching, and painting necessary for the
          installation of the electrical work shall be done under
          this division.  Any damage done to work already in place
          shall be restored to original condition at the Contractors
          expense.  Patching shall be uniform in appearance and shall
          match the surrounding surfaces.  Painting, where required,
          shall match existing paint.

     B.   All exposed equipment including conduit installed under
          this Division shall be cleaned and left in a condition
          ready for painting.  All items not provided with a
          corrosion-resistant finish shall be painted in accordance
          with Section 09900 "Painting".  All electrical panels,
          control equipment, and supporting framework except as
          indicated otherwise , shall have a light gray enamel finish
          which may be the manufacturer's standard gray, if
          acceptable to the University.  Where the finish becomes
          scratched or marred, it shall be touched-up or repainted to
          match the original finish as directed by the University or
          their designated representative.  Particular caution shall
          be exercised so as not to obscure the nameplate data.

3.10 SLEEVES AND PLATES

     A.   Sleeves shall be provided by the Contractor for the
          installation of conduit, etc.  The sleeves shall be
          carefully located in advance of the construction of walls
          and floors where new construction is involved.  Provide all
          cutting and patching necessary to set sleeves which are not
          placed prior to construction.

     B.   Sleeves shall be provided for all conduit, etc. passing
          through concrete, masonry, construction.  Caulk the annular
          space of sleeves with an elastic, fire resistant caulking
          compound to make the installation fire, air, and water
          tight.

     C.   Fasten sleeves securely in the construction so that they
          will not become displaced when concrete is poured or when
          other construction is built around them.  Take precautions
          to prevent concrete, plaster or other materials being
          forced into space between conduit, etc., and sleeve during
          construction.

     D.   Sleeves required in existing concrete or masonry walls
          shall be set and secured with mortar grout and fast drying
          bitumastic sealant.

     E.   Seal all the openings between conduit, etc. and
          corresponding sleeves to prevent sound transmission and to
          maintain fire rating at all sleeves where objectionable
          noise can be transmitted; at all smoke barriers; at all
          walls above ceilings that extend to underside of the
          structure of floor above, or at fire rated separations. 
          Use U.L. approved resilient sealant for penetration seals. 
          Submit method of sealing for approval.  Where watertight
          sleeves are indicated or required to suit the installation,
          provide Link Seal rubber seals, as manufactured by
          Thunderline Corporation, between pipe and sleeves.

     F.   Where conduit motion due to expansion and contraction will
          occur, make sleeves of sufficient diameter to permit free
          movement of conduit.  Check construction to determine
          proper length for various locations; make actual lengths.

3.11 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

     A.   The Contractor shall do all excavating and backfilling
          necessary to install underground electrical work included
          in this division of the specifications.  He shall establish
          all lines and grades required for the proper location of
          the work and shall be responsible for the correctness
          thereof.  He shall check the elevation of all utilities
          before starting the work.  Excavation and backfill shall be
          performed in accordance with other sections of these
          specifications.

     B.   All work shall comply with Division 2.

3.12 TESTING

     A.   Upon completion of the work and prior to energization of
          any equipment, the Contractor shall in the presence of the
          University or their designated representative, operate,
          test, adjust, and retest if necessary, the complete
          electrical system to be energized.  The system shall
          function fully and completely as designed and intended.

          1.   Final test reports shall be submitted within 15 days
               to the University.

          2.   Preliminary test reports shall be submitted to the
               University and/or their designated representative and
               additionally to the Department of Physical Plant
               representative before equipment is energized.

     B.   The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, supplies,
          equipment, instruments, and power necessary for testing. 
          The test shall demonstrate the following to the University:

          1.   Measure the ground resistance of the electrical
               installation ground system.  The resistance shall not
               exceed 5 ohms.

          2.   Continuity of wire and cables, and all circuits are
               free from short circuits and from unspecified grounds.

          3.   Any other testing required under the following
               sections of this Division 16 work.

     C.   All defects shall be repaired or replaced at once and the
          tests reconducted at the Contractor's expense.

     D.   For the purpose of these tests, normal and emergency
          conditions may be simulated during these tests if approved
          by the University.  The services of the manufacturer's
          factory-trained service engineer shall be provided to
          inspect the installation of all equipment furnished under
          this division to assure that it is installed in accordance
          with the manufacturer's instructions, shall assist with
          start-up and instruct operating personnel in the operation
          and maintenance of the equipment.  These services shall be
          provided for two working days (maximum two trips to
          installation).  In addition, the manufacturer shall include
          three one-day trips at four month intervals for the first
          year of operation to inspect and adjust the equipment.

3.13 SPECIAL TESTING

     A.   Inspection and testing shall be conducted on all building
          electrical equipment used by the contractor for the
          purposes of construction support other than normal building
          services as intended for occupancy.  If any construction
          efforts utilize the building electrical system, than the
          Contractor shall perform the following as a minimum, to
          investigate and identify any damage caused by this
          construction use.  This shall be performed and supplied
          solely at the cost of the contractor.

          1.   The Contractor shall perform an Infra Red Scan, with
               photographic documentation of all "hot spots".  This
               test shall be performed on all bus and bolted
               connections of the switchboard, transformers, and all
               panel boards, prior to any correction action to any of
               the above.

          2.   The Contractor shall re-torque all bolted connections
               and bus joints for the switchboard, transformers, and
               all panelboards.  This shall be performed by a
               calibrated-torque-wrench method, and shall comply with
               torquing requirements of the manufacturer of the
               specific equipment.  Bus plates or connectors that are
               damaged (show "hot spots") shall be replaced with
               manufacturers replacements components.

          3.   After performing the above re-torquing, the Contractor
               shall re-perform the Infra-Red Scan on all the
               connections as required above.  Photographic
               documentation of the connection initially identified
               shall be photographed to confirm the non-existence of
               any of the "hot spots" previously submitted under
               Section 3.13.A.1 above.  This photographic proof shall
               be submitted as verification of this work.

     B.   The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and
          materials required to perform all tests and corrective
          action required in this section (3.13).

     C.   All tests under this Section (3.13) shall be performed in
          the presence of the University and their designated
          representative.

3.14 GROUNDING

     A.   The entire electrical installation shall be grounded in
          accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical
          Code, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., IEEE, ANSI, and NESC
          latest editions.

3.15 LOW VOLTAGE CERTIFICATION

     A.   All phases of electrical installation shall be inspected by
          an independent electrical inspection agency (non-government
          agency approved by State of Maryland Fire Marshall). 
          Inspection reports on all phases of work shall be submitted
          to the University, Department of Architecture, Engineering
          and Construction.  The inspection must be applied for, and
          paid by, the State.

     B.   The Contractor shall furnish a certificate of approval from
          an independent inspection agency, which indicates that the
          installation is in accordance with the National Electrical
          Code and other pertinent codes when applicable.  The
          certificate shall be presented to the University's
          Department of Architecture, Engineering and Construction
          prior to the submission of final invoice.

3.16 MEDIUM VOLTAGE TESTING

     A.   All inspections and testing of medium voltage components
          shall be performed by an independent testing agency. The
          Contractor shall contract testing agency as per
          Specification "17 XX" "Electrical Testing Specification". 
          The Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate his work with
          the testing agency.

     B.   When initial tests indicate failure due to non-compliance
          with the contract documents or sub-standard work, the
          Contractor shall work to comply with the contract documents
          at no cost to the University.

     C.   Retesting due to non-compliance with contract documents or
          sub-standard work shall be performed by the same testing
          agency, and the costs of retesting shall be paid by the
          Contractor.



SECTION 16050                           BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A.   Basic Materials

B.   Connection of Utilization equipment.

C.   Supports.

D.   Identification.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

Product Data:  Provide catalog data for devices.

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

All work shall conform to the requirements of all authorities having
jurisdiction over this work and latest editions of the codes,
regulations and specifications, as listed in Section 16010, Article
1.04.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 BASIC MATERIALS

A.   Steel Channel:  Galvanized steel.

B.   Miscellaneous hardware:  Treat for corrosion resistance.

C.   Nameplates:  Engraved, Phenolic laminated plastic, 0.125 inch
     thick, white background with black core, with beveled edges. 
     ALL LETTERING SHALL BE UPPERCASE.

     1.   Nameplate for each cubicle of 15KV switch shall indicate
          the function of cubicle, the building supplied, etc.  Use
          1/2" high engravings.

     2.   Nameplate for each equipment enclosure, switch and device
          shall identify the enclosure, function and loads
          supplied.  Use 1/4" high engravings.

     3.   Attach nameplates to each cable or wire located in
          manholes, pullboxes and at each splice and termination. 
          The nameplate shall identify voltage, circuit, cable
          size, cable installation date, and phase of the circuit. 
          Use 1/2" high letters for phases and 1/4" for the rest. 
          Cable tags shall be secured in place with 14 gauge 
          non-ferrous wire.

     4.   Phases of all 600V wire shall be identified at all splice
          and termination points using colored tape.  Colors shall
          be black, red, and blue for 208 volt phase conductors and
          white for neutrals, orange, brown, and yellow for 480
          volt phase conductors, slate for neutrals, and green for
          ground conductors.

D.   Warning Signs:  Provide warning signs for the enclosures of
     electrical substations, transformers, and switch gear with
     normal ratings exceeding 600 volts.  "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE"
     sign shall be bonderized metal or vinyl film, 2" high red gloss
     enamel letters on white enamel background.  When the above
     mentioned equipment is guarded by a fence, mount signs on the
     fence.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A.   Install products in accordance with manufacturer's
     instructions.

B.   Make electrical connections to utilization equipment in
     accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

     1.   Verify that wiring and outlet rough-in work is complete
          and that utilization equipment is ready for electrical
          connection, wiring, and energization.

     2.   Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring
          compartment of pre-wired equipment.  Provide
          interconnecting wiring.

     3.   Install and connect disconnect switches, controllers,
          control stations, and control devices.

     4.   Use wiring and cable with insulation suitable for
          temperatures encountered in heat-producing equipment.

     5.   Install pre-fabricated cord set where connection with
          attachment plug is specified, or use attachment plug with
          suitable strain-relief clamps.

     6.   Provide suitable staring-relief clamps for cord
          connections to outlet boxes and equipment connection
          boxes.

C.   Install support systems sized and fastened to accommodate
     weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they
     carry.

     1.   Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and
          junction boxes to building structure using precast insert
          system, expansion anchors or beam clamps.

     2.   Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow
          masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls;
          expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry
          walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on
          concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal
          studs; and wood screws in wood construction.

     3.   Do not fasten supports to piping, ceiling support wires,
          ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.

     4.   Do not use powder-actuated anchors.

     5.   Do not drill structural steel members.

     6.   Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel
          channel, rigidly welded or bolted.

     7.   Install free-standing electrical equipment on concrete
          pads.

     8.   Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with
          minimum of four anchors.

     9.   Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinets one inch
          off wall in wet locations.

     10.  Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support
          flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls.

D.   Identify electrical distribution and control equipment, and
     loads serviced, to meet regulatory requirements and as
     required.

     1.   Install nameplate on each cubicle door of 15KV loop feed
          switch unit.  Secure in place with brass screws.

     2.   Fasten nameplate to enclosure, switch and device using a
          minimum of two sheet metal screws and two rivets, with
          edges parallel to equipment lines.  Secure nameplate to
          inside face of panelboard doors in finished locations.

     3.   "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE" signs shall be installed on each
          door of loop feed switch, door to cubicles of pad-mounted
          transformer, door to metal enclosed fuse cabinet.

     4.   Install cable identification tapes for all 600V wire.

E.   Install wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters,
     pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connections.

     1.   Use branch circuit or feeder number to identify power and
          lighting circuits.

     2.   Use control wire number as indicated on schematic and
          interconnection diagrams and equipment manufacturer's
          shop drawings to identify control wiring.



SECTION 16110                                      RACEWAY SYSTEMS (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 

     A.   Conduit and fittings.

     B.   Wireway.

     C.   Surface raceway system.

     D.   Electrical boxes, cabinets and enclosures.

     E.   Cable Tray.

1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

     A.   Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70, ASTM, NEMA.

     B.   Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories, inc.
          or other testing firm acceptable to the authority having
          jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

     A.   Use only specified raceway in the following locations:

          Indoor and Outdoor Locations:

          1.   Installation in or under concrete slab shall be rigid
               galvanized steel conduit only.

          2.   Exposed outdoor locations:  Only rigid galvanized
               steel conduit shall be used.  Use threaded or
               raintight fittings for metal conduits.

          3.   Wet interior locations:  Rigid galvanized steel
               conduit.  Use threaded or raintight fittings.

          4.   Concealed dry interior locations:  Electrical metallic
               tubing.

          5.   Exposed dry interior locations:  Rigid steel conduit.

          6.   Connections to vibration producing equipments shall be
               liquid tight flexible metallic conduit for exterior
               and wet locations.

          7.   Connections to motors for all locations shall be
               liquid tight flexible metallic conduit.

          8.   The building distribution system with raceway conduits
               in slab shall not be permitted.

          9.   Raceway/conduit in finished areas shall be concealed
               by architectural surfaces.

          10.  For connections for lighting fixtures, VAV Boxes, and
               receptacles, refer to Section 16119 Part 3.

          11.  Cable tray shall only be used for distribution of
               Telecommunications, Fibre, and COAX.  Cable tray shall
               not be permitted for POWER distribution.

2.02 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

     A.   Use of the following types of conduits and fittings shall
          not be permitted in any application for this project:

          1.   Set screw type conduit fittings.

          2.   "Pot metal" or "White metal" conduit fittings.

          3.   Intermediate metal conduit as a substitute for rigid
               galvanized steel conduits.

          4.   Rigid Aluminum Conduit, Cable Tray and fittings.

          5.   PVC Type 'EB'.

     B.   Conduit:

          1.   Rigid Steel Conduit:  Galvanized steel, ANSI C80.1.

          2.   Flexible Metallic Conduit:  Steel, FSWW-C-SA.

          3.   Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit:  Flexible conduit with
               PVC jacket.

          4.   Plastic Conduit:  NEMA TC 2; PVC.  Use Schedule 40
               conduit.

          5.   Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit:  Flexible metal conduit
               with PVC Jacket, Teflon (TFE) coated for installation
               in the planum spaces.

          6.   Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):  ANSI C80.3.

     C.   Conduit Fittings:

          1.   Metal Fittings and Conduit Bodies:  ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

          2.   Plastic Fittings and Conduit Bodies:  NEMA TC 3.

          3.   Steel compression fittings shall be used with EMT
               without exception.

2.03 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MOA)

     A.   Sheet metal channel with fitted cover suitable for use as
          multi-outlet assembly.  Receptacles mounted in cover at
          eighteen (18) inches on center.  Finish shall be Gray. 
          Plug mold shall not be acceptable.

     B.   All MOA's shall be two channel; one channel for Power and
          one channel for telephone, and shall be Wire Mold Series
          4000 or approved equal.

2.04 WIREWAY AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

     A.   Sheet metal channel with fitted cover suitable for use as
          multi-outlet assembly.  Receptacles mounted in cover at
          eighteen (18) inches on center.  Finish shall be Gray. 
          Plug mold shall not be acceptable.

     B.   All MOA's shall be two channel; one channel for Power and
          one channel for telephone, and shall be Wire Mold Series
          4000 or approved equal.

2.05 WIREWAY AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

     A.   Wireway:  General purpose type with knockouts.

          1.   Cover: Screw cover with full gasketing.

          2.   Connector:  Slip-in construction; screw cover. 

          3.   Fittings:  Lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and
               side; captive screws.

          4.   Finish:  Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray
               enamel finish.

2.06 ELECTRICAL BOXES

     A.   Boxes:

          1.   Sheet Metal:  NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel.

          2.   Cast Metal:  Cast alloy, deep type, gasketed cover,
               threaded hubs.

          3.   Nonmetallic:  NEMA OS 2.

     B.   Floor Boxes for Installation in Cast-in-place Concrete
          Floors:  Fully adjustable, cast iron or formed steel.

     C.   Hinged Cover Enclosures:  NEMA 250; Type 2, steel enclosure
          with manufacturer's standard enamel finish and continuous
          hinge cover, held closed by flush latch operable by
          screwdriver.

     D.   Large Cast Metal Boxes:

          1.   Surface-Mounted Type:  NEMA 250; Type 1 and Type 2,
               flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box; galvanized
               cast iron box and cover with ground flange, neoprene
               gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.

          2.   Underground Type:  NEMA 250; Type 4, Inside flanged,
               recessed cover box for flush mounting; galvanized cast
               iron box and plain cover with neoprene gasket and
               stainless steel cover screws.

     E.   All junction and pullbox covers shall be painted and
          circuits identified.  The color code to be used is as
          follows:  CCMS shall be green; communications shall be
          blue; fire alarm shall be red; and security system shall be
          yellow.

2.07 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

     A.   Hinged Cover Enclosures.

          1.   Construction:  NEMA 250; NEMA Type 1 enclosure in dry
               locations, and NEMA type 4 steel in wet or damp
               locations.

          2.   Finish:  Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

          3.   Covers:  Continuously hinged, held closed by flush
               latch operable by key or a screwdriver.

          4.   Interior panel for mounting terminal blocks or
               electrical components:  white enamel finish, 14 gauge
               steel.

     B.   Electrical Cabinets.

          1.   Construction:  Galvanized steel with removable end
               walls.

          2.   Cabinet Fronts:  Steel, flush type with concealed
               hinge and flush lock; finish in gray baked enamel.

          3.   Cabinet size as required with backboard for mounting
               terminal blocks etc.

          4.   Terminal Blocks:  ANSI/NEMA ICS 4.  Provide ground bus
               terminal block with each connector bonded to
               enclosure.

2.08 LADDER-TYPE CABLE TRAY

     A.   Description:  NEMA VE 1, ladder type tray, as manufactured
          by B-line or approved equal.

     B.   Material:  ASTM A570, Grade 33 for 14 Gauge fittings shall
          have not less than the load-carrying ability of straight
          tray sections.

     C.   Finish:  ASTM A 123, hot dipped galvanized after
          fabrication.  Painted with gray epoxy.

     D.   Inside Width:  Shall be suitable for 30 percent future
          growth.

     E.   Inside Depth:  Shall be suitable for 30 percent future
          growth.

     F.   Straight Section Rung Spacing:  9 inches on center.

     G.   Inside Radius of Fittings:  As required.

     H.   Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets,
          splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips,
          connectors, and grounding straps.

2.09 WARNING SIGNS

     A.   Engraved Nameplates:  3/4 inch high black letters on yellow
          laminated plastic nameplate, engraved with the following
          wording:

               WARNING!  DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS
               WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT.  USE
               ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR
               CABLES AND TUBING!

2.10 PULL ROPES

     A.   Install pull ropes in all spare raceways.  Pull ropes shall
          be multi-strand polypropylene monofilament, with minimum         
          size of 3 strand 3/16 inch diameter and 800 pound breaking
          strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

     A.   Examine supporting surfaces to determine that surfaces are
          ready to receive work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

     A.   Arrange tubing and conduit to maintain headroom and to
          present neat mechanical appearance.

          1.   Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to
               walls and adjacent piping.

          2.   Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance to piping and 12
               inch clearance to heat surfaces such as flues, steam
               pipes, and heating appliances.

          3.   Maintain required fire, acoustic, and vapor barrier
               rating when penetrating walls, floors, and ceilings.

          4.   Route conduit through roof openings for piping and
               ductwork where possible; otherwise, route through roof
               jack with pitch pocket.

          5.   Group in parallel runs where practical.  Use conduit
               rack constructed of steel channel.  Maintain spacing
               between raceways or de-rate circuit ampacities to NFPA
               70 requirements.

          6.   Use conduit hangers and clamps; do not fasten with
               wire or perforated pipe straps.

          7.   Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction.

          8.   Terminate conduit stubs with insulated bushings.

          9.   Use suitable caps to protect installed raceway against
               entrance of dirt and moisture.

          10.  Install expansion joints where raceway crosses
               building expansion joints.

          11.  Install plastic conduit and tubing in accordance with
               manufacturer's instructions.

     B.   Install surface metal raceway and multi-outlet assemblies
          in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

          1.   Use flat-head screws or clips and straps suitable for
               the purpose, to fasten channel to surfaces.  Mount
               plumb and level.

          2.   Use suitable insulated bushings and inserts at
               connections to outlets and corner fittings in metal
               raceway.

          3.   Use fittings and accessories designed for use with
               raceway system.

     C.   Install auxiliary gutter and wireway in accordance with
          manufacturer's instructions.

          1.   Bolt auxiliary gutter to steel channels fastened to
               wall or in self-supporting structure.  Install level.

          2.   Mount raintight gutter in horizontal position only.

     D.   Install electrical boxes as required for splices, taps,
          wire pulling, equipment connections,and regulatory
          requirements.

          1.   Use cast outlet box in exterior locations and wet
               locations.

          2.   Use hinged cover enclosure for interior pull and
               junction box larger than 12 inches in any dimension.

          3.   Locate and install electrical boxes to allow access. 
               Provide access panels if required.

          4.   Locate and install electrical boxes to maintain
               headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance.

          5.   Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible
               ceilings or in unfinished areas.

          6.   Provide knockout closures for unused openings.

          7.   align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches,
               thermostats, and similar devices.

          8.   Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets
               above counters, benches, and backsplashes.

          9.   Install lighting outlets to locate luminaries.

     E.   Use recessed outlet boxes in finished areas or as required.

          1.   Secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs,
               accurately positioning to allow for surface finish
               thickness.

          2.   Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in
               hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel
               fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes.

          3.   Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting
               corner only.  Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve
               neat openings for boxes.

          4.   Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls; provide 6
               inch separation, minimum.  In acoustic-rated walls
               provide 24 inch separation, minimum.

          5.   Do not damage insulation.

     F.   Install floor boxes in accordance with manufacturer's
          instructions.

          1.   Set boxes level and flush with finish flooring
               material.

          2.   Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on
               grade.

     G.   Drill floor opening and install poke-through fittings in
          accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

     H.   Interface outlet box and floor box installation with
          furniture.

     I.   Size raceways for type THHN/THWN conductors and the minimum
          conduit size shall be 3/4 inches except 1/2 inch conduit
          can be used for control wires.

     J.   Install cable tray in accordance with manufacturer's
          instructions and in accordance with NEMA VE-1.

          1.   Install cable trays parallel with or at right angles
               to ceilings, walls, and structural members.  All
               edges, fittings, and hardware shall be finished free
               from burrs and sharp edges.  A No. 2 AWG bare copper
               wire shall be laid throughout the cable tray system
               and bonded to each section.

          2.   Provide supports as required.  Provide supports at
               each connection point, at the end of each run, and at
               other points to maintain spacing.

          3.   Use expansion connectors where required.

          4.   Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of other
               Sections of this specifications.

               a.   Provide continuity between tray components.

               b.   Provide 2 AWG bare copper equipment grounding
                    conductor through entire length of tray; bond to
                    each component.

               c.   Connections to tray may be made using mechanical
                    or exothermic connections.

          5.   Install warning signs at 50 foot centers along cable
               tray, located to be visible.



SECTION 16119                                       WIRING SYSTEMS (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 

     A.   Wire and cable.

     B.   Wiring devices.

     C.   Service fittings.

1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

     A.   Insulated Cable Engineer Association (ICEA).

     B.   SEE SECTION 16010, "GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS".

1.03 SUBMITTALS

     A.   Shop Drawings:  Indicate proposed layout of flexible wiring
          system.

     B.   Product Data:  Provide product data for wire and cable, and
          wiring devices, including color options.

     C.   Field Test Report:  Describe test procedures and results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRE AND CABLE

     A.   Building Wire:

          1.   Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger Than 10 AWG: 
               Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation,
               THHN/THWN, rated at 75 degree C.

          2.   Feeders and Branch Circuits 10 AWG and Smaller: 
               Copper, 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN solid
               conductor, rated at 75 degree C.  No conductor smaller
               than #12 AWG is acceptable.

          3.   Control Circuits:  Copper, stranded conductor, 600
               volt insulation, THWN/THHN.  Number of Conductors as
               required.  No smaller than #14 AWG is acceptable.

     B.   Forbidden Cables:

          1.   Use of BX (Armored) Cable and Romex Cable is not
               permitted, except restricted use of MC cable is
               allowed for lighting fixtures, VAV boxes, and
               receptacles.  Refer to PART 3 of this Section.

     C.   Remote Control and Signal Cables:

          1.   Control cable for remote control and signal circuits: 
               Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation, rated 60 degree
               C., individual conductors twisted together and covered
               with PVC jacket.

          2.   Plenum cable for remote control and signal circuits
               shall be U.L. listed for use in air handling ducts,
               hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.

     D.   Color coding shall be a permanent part of and uniform
          throughout the entire length of the jacket material of the
          cable and shall be used throughout the building for feeders
          and branch circuits.  Color applied to the outer surface
          only is not acceptable.  Color coding shall be:

                              480/277 Volts       208/120 Volts
               Phase             Color                Color

                 A              Orange               Black

                 B               Brown                 Red

                 C              Yellow                Blue

             Neutral              Gray               White

              Ground             Green               Green

2.02 WIRING DEVICES AND WALL PLATES

     A.   Manufacturers:

          1.   Hubbell
          2.   Arrow-Hart
          3.   Bryant
          4.   Lutron

     B.   Wall Switch:  AC general use, quiet-operating snap switch,
          rated 20 amperes and 120-277 volts AC, with plastic toggle
          handle, ivory color.

     C.   Receptacle:

          1.   Provide straight-blade receptacles to NEMA WD 1.

          2.   Provide locking-blade receptacles to NEMA WD 5.

          3.   Convenience Receptacle Configuration:  Type 5-20 R,
               plastic face, grounded type, color to match with
               Architectural Finishes.

          4.   Specific-Purpose Receptacle:  Configuration as
               required with plastic face color to match with
               Architectural Finish.

          5.   GFCI Receptacle:  Duplex convenience receptacle with
               integral ground fault current interrupter, test, and
               reset push buttons.

     D.   Device Plates:  Outlet boxes containing wiring devices
          shall be provided with suitable device plates.

          1.   Device plates for interior use on flush-mounted
               devices shall be satin finish type 302 stainless
               steel.

          2.   Device plates for interior use on surface-mounted
               devices shall be galvanized sheet metal with rounded
               corners.

     E.   Weatherproof Cover Plate:  Match receptacle configuration
          provided for equipment connection.  Gasketed cast metal
          with gasketed device covers.

     F.   Attachment Plug Cap:  Match receptacle configuration
          provided for equipment connection.

     G.   Wall Dimmer:  Slide type, color to match Architectural,
          NEMA WD-2.

          1.   Rating:  1000 watts minimum, size to accommodate
               circuit load.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

     A.   No wiring shall be installed until the building is under
          roof.  Do not install wire in raceways until after concrete
          work fireproofing or plastering is completed.

     B.   Verify that mechanical work which is likely to injure
          conductors has been completed.

     C.   Completely and thoroughly swab and rod raceway system
          before installing conductors.

3.02 INSTALLATION

     A.   Wiring Methods:

          1.   Concealed Interior Locations:  Building wire in
               raceway.
          2.   Exposed Interior Locations:  Building wire in raceway.

          3.   Above Accessible Ceilings:  Building wire in raceway.

          4.   Wet or Damp Interior Locations:  Building wire in
               raceway.

          5.   Exterior Locations:  Building wire in raceways.

          6.   Underground Locations:  Control and Power wiring in
               schedule 40 PVC concrete encased ductbank.

     B.   The conduit system shall be completed between terminations
          of each conduit line, before installing any wires and
          cables.

     C.   All wires and cables shall be carefully handled during
          installation so as to avoid mechanical injury to the
          conductor insulation or covering.

     D.   Use powdered soapstone, Minerallac "Pull-in" Compound No.
          100 or Electro-Compound Company's "Y-er-eas" for pulling
          wire and cable into conduit. Oil or grease shall not be
          permitted for this purpose.

     E.   During the installation of cable, the minimum cable bending
          radius shall not be less than the minimum dictated by the
          manufacturer and governing codes.

     F.   During the pulling of cable into conduit, care shall be
          exercised not to exceed the Manufacturer's recommendations
          for maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.

     G.   Minimum wire sizing for general 15 and 20 amp branch
          circuit shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated, or
          as required by the NEC:

          Home Run Length          Wire Size

          120 Volt

          0-60'                    #12
          60-100'                  #10
          100' & Up                 #8

          277 Volt

          0-100'                   #12
          100-250'                 #10
          250 & Up                  #8

          Circuit Length      Wire Size

          0-100'                   #12
          100' & Up                #10

          Circuit length given above shall be the wire length between
          the first and last outlet on the circuit.  Homerun length
          shall be the wire length between the first outlet and
          panelboard.

     H.   Neatly train and secure all wiring inside boxes, equipment,
          and panelboards.

     I.   Protect exposed cables.

     J.   Support cables above accessible ceiling to keep them from
          resting on ceiling tiles.  Mechanical piping or duct shall
          not be used as support for electrical conduit.

     K.   In Garage:  Conduit at or below bottom of a precast Tees
          shall not be permitted.

3.03 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

     A.   Cables shall be continuous from point-to-point without
          splices or tapes.  Splices and tapes when required shall be
          in properly sized boxes or manhole/handholes.

     B.   Compression type lugs and connectors shall be used for all
          splices and terminations.  The compression tooling and dies
          used shall be those recommended by the Manufacturer of the
          lugs and connectors.

          1.   Joints of #10AWG and smaller shall be made with
               insulated solderless type pressure connectors.  Where
               stranded conductors or multiple solid conductors are
               connected to terminals, solderless lugs manufactured
               by Thomas and Betts Company or equivalent shall be
               used.

          2.   Joints of #8AWG and larger in power and lighting
               circuits shall be of the type indented into the
               conductor by means of hydraulic pressure tool. 
               Connectors shall be Burndy "Hy-dent" or equal. 
               Connectors for control wiring shall be Burndy "Hy-Lug"
               or equal.  Connectors shall have two (2) bolted
               connections only.

     C.   Stress cones shall be used at each splice, tap, or
          termination.  The materials and methods used shall be those
          as recommended by the cable Manufacturer.

     D.   Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity
          of conductors without temperature rise.  No splice or
          joints will be permitted in either feeders or branch
          circuits except accessible jurisdiction boxes.

     E.   Splices below grade or those in NEMA 4 junctions boxes
          shall be 'scotch-cast' insulated (3M product) or equal. 
          Aluminum fittings shall not be used for splices,
          terminations or connections.

3.04 WIRING DEVICES

     Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's
     instructions.

     A.   Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, OFF position
          down, on the strike side of doorways.

     B.   Install wall dimmers 48 inches above finished floor.  
          De-rate ganged dimmers as instructed by manufacturer.  Do not
          use common neutral.

     C.   Install convenience receptacles 18" inches above finished
          floor, in office and 24" above finished floor in open area
          with grounding pole on top, and minimum 9 inches above
          backsplashes or counters with grounding pole on top.

     D.   Install specific purpose receptacles at heights as directed
          by user and/or University of Maryland, Department of
          Architecture, Engineering and Construction (DAEC).

     E.   Install 20 Amp, 2 pole, 3 wire ground fault interrupter
          receptacles on the parking garage and the new building
          exterior and at the top and bottom of all stairways of the
          parking garage, as directed by the DAEC's Design Manager. 
          These receptacles shall be weatherproof and waterproof with
          lockable coverplates for exterior maintenance use.

     F.   All corridors and public areas and rooms shall be switched
          from one access point with the exception that two/three way
          switches shall be installed when access points are more
          than 15 feet apart, or rooms have more than one doorway.

     G.   Install duplex convenience receptacles in corridors at 30
          foot intervals, 18 inches above finished floor with the
          grounding pole on the top.

     H.   Switches shall be connected to phase conductors only.

     I.   Install wall plates flush and level.

          1.   Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and
               blank outlets in finished areas using over-sized
               plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.

          2.   Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and
               junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible
               ceilings, and on surface-mounted outlets.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

     A.   Perform field inspection and testing as specified under
          other sections of these specifications.

          1.   Inspect wire and cables for physical damage and proper
               connection.

          2.   Torque test conductor connections and terminations to
               manufacturer's recommended values.

          3.   Perform continuity test on all power and equipment
               branch circuit conductors.  Verify proper phasing
               connections.

          4.   Test all GFI devices for proper operation.

3.06 WIRING FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES, RECEPTACLES:

     A.   MC cable shall be allowed for connections from junction box
          to lighting fixture and shall not be more than 6 feet of
          length.  MC cable from lighting fixture to lighting fixture
          shall not be allowed.

     B.   MC cable shall be allowed from junction box to the
          receptacles in the same room.

     C.   MC cable shall not be allowed to cross one room to another
          room whether the wall between two rooms goes up to slab or
          not.  If the rooms are identified as two separate rooms, MC
          cable shall not be used between the two rooms.

     D.   Back-to-back receptacles shall not be accepted and MC cable
          shall not be used, between two receptacles when they are in
          two separate rooms, on the same wall.



SECTION 16122                   MEDIUM VOLTAGE (MV) (5000V TO 35KV)
                                     CABLE, SPLICE, AND TERMINATION (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

     A.   The general provisions of the Contract, including General
          and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply
          to the work specified in this section.

          1.   Applicable portions of Section 16010 shall apply to
               the work specified in this section.

          2.   Applicable requirements of current standards of the
               following associations shall apply to the products
               specified in this section and their installation:

               National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

               National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)

               American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)

               Association of Ediston Illuminating Companies (AEIC)
               CS-6

               Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

               Underwriter Laboratories (UL)  UL-1072 (Type MV-90)

               Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

1.02 SCOPE

     A.   The work includes all labor, materials, equipment, and
          services necessary for the installation of a complete,
          operations system and each item comprising the system.

     B.   There shall be no splices except those which have been
          specifically requested by the contractor and approved by
          the University.

     C.   Cable slack shall be provided in the manholes for future
          splicing.  Slack shall be supported on all the sides of
          manholes, with a minimum of cable racked on three walls
          within each manhole.

     D.   All cable shall be new and unused and shall be on the
          manufacturer's reels as shipped.  Cable damaged in shipment
          or handling will not be acceptable for use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SINGLE CONDUCTOR (1/C) 15KV CABLE:

     A.   The cable shall comply with all requirements of the
          National Electrical Code for type MV wire, rated for 90
          degree C. for normal operation, 133 percent insulation
          level, 130 degree C. for emergency overload operation, and
          250 degree C. for short circuit conditions.  Emergency
          overload operations may occur for periods up to 1500 hours
          cumulative during the life of the cable.  Cable shall be
          suitable for use in wet and dry location in conduits,
          underground duct systems, direct buried, and aerial
          installation.

     B.   The cable shall consist of an inner conductor, conductor
          shield, insulation, insulation shield, metallic shield and
          outer jacket, as specified herein.

     C.   Tests shall be performed at the factory of each reel of
          cable.  The results shall be documented and certified by
          the manufacturer.  One copy of the data for each reel shall
          be shipped with each reel and one copy shall be mailed to
          the Engineer.  The tests shall be:

          1.   Conductor temperature

          2.   Conductor DC resistance

          3.   High Voltage:

               (a)  44 kVAC for 5 minutes
               (b)  80 kVDC for 15 minutes (min.)
               (c)  Shield resistance as measured.
               (d)  Insulation resistance as measured in megohms.
               (e)  Insulation resistance not less than that
                    corresponding to the insulation resistance
                    constant of at least 50,000 megohm-1000 ft at
                    15.6 degree C. (60 degree F.).
               (f)  Corona discharge for compliance with AEIC
                    requirements.
               (g)  Water block test in compliance with ICEA T-31-610.

     D.   Manufacturers shall be:  Okonite, Kerite, or Pirelli.

2.02 INNER CONDUCTOR

     The inner conductor shall be uncoated soft copper class B,
     stranded, with a conductivity of at least 98% per ASTM B-8.  The
     inner conductor shall meet the electrical resistance
     requirements of ICEA S-68-516, Section 2.5.

2.03 CONDUCTOR SHIELD (LAYER SURROUNDING THE INNER CONDUCTOR)

     Shall be an extruded layer of semiconducting EPR thermosetting
     compound with a volume resistivity not in excess of 10 ohm
     meters at 90 degree C.  The compound shall have a minimum
     elongation after an air oven test at 121 degree C. for 168 hours
     of 100% and a brittleness temperature not warmer than - 50
     degree C.  The shield shall be clean stripping from the
     conductor and inseparable bonded to the overlying insulation. 
     The thickness of the extruded conductor shield shall be a
     minimum of 15 mils.

2.04 INSULATION (LAYER SURROUNDING THE CONDUCTOR SHIELD)

     Shall be flexible thermosetting dielectric based on an ethylene
     propylene elastomer.  The ethylene content of the elastomer used
     in the insulation compound shall not exceed 72% by weight of
     ethylene nor shall the insulation compound contain any
     polyethylene, both features to limit the degree of
     susceptibility to treeing experienced by highly crystalline
     materials.  All ingredients shall be mixed, screened through a
     120 mesh screen pack, and then treated with the accelerator or
     cross linking agent to insure complete blending and uniformity
     of the final compound.  The minimum average insulation thickness
     shall not be less than 220 mils.  The insulation shall have 44KV
     for 5 minute AC withstand and shall have 80KV for 15 minutes DC
     withstand.  The minimum thickness at any cross-section of the
     insulation shall not be less than 90% of the specified minimum
     average thickness.  The insulation shall be triple-tandem
     extruded with the conductor and insulation shield to prevent
     inter-surface contamination.

2.05 INSULATION SHIELD (LAYER SURROUNDING THE INSULATION)

     Shall be an extruded semiconducting EPR compound with a volume
     resistivity not in excess of 10 ohm-meters at 90 degree C. when
     tested per AEIC No. CS-6.  The extruded shield shall be clean
     stripping and shall have a peel strength for the insulation
     between 6 and 18 lbs./0.5 inch width when tested per AEIC No.
     CS-6.  This compound shall have a minimum elongation after an
     air oven test at 121 degree C. for 168 hours of 100% and a 
     brittleness temperature not warmer than -50 degree C.  The
     thickness of the extruded shield shall be in accordance with the
     following:

               Calculated              Insulation
                Minimum             Shields thickness
          Dia. Over Insulation            (mils)           Max
                 Inches                  Min. point       point

                 0 - 1.000                 30              70
             1.001 - 1.500                 40              85
             1.501 - 2.000                 55             100
             2.001 & over                  55             115

     The outer surface of the insulation shield shall be continuously
     printed with contrasting colored ink - "Semi-conducting - Remove
     When Splicing or Terminating".

2.06 METALLIC SHIELD (LAYER SURROUNDING THE INSULATION SHIELD)

     Shall be covered with an uncoated copper tape.  It shall be
     applied helically with a 12-1/2% minimum overlap.

2.07 OUTER JACKET (LAYER SURROUNDING THE METALLIC SHIELD)

     Shall be black polyvinylchloride.  The jacket thickness shall be
     as shown below:

               Cable Core               Jacket Thickness
           Diameter (inches)         Minimum Average (mils)

               0 - 0.425                     45
           0.426 - 0.700                     60
           0.701 - 1.500                     80
           1.501 - 2.500                    110
           2.501 & Larger                   140

     The minimum thickness at any point shall not be less than 80% of
     the specified minimum average thickness.

2.08 IDENTIFICATIONS

     A.   A permanent marker tape including: The Manufacturer's
          Company Name, plant number, cable size, insulation, 
          voltage rating, year of manufacture, and sequential footage
          number repeated each foot shall be inserted under the
          copper shielding tape.

     B.   The outer covering shall bear the manufacturer's name,
          conductor size, type insulation & voltage rating
          permanently marked at regular intervals.

2.09 TERMINATION FITTINGS (FOR 1/c, 15KV WIRE):

     A.   Termination fittings shall be compatible with the wire they
          terminate as recommended by the fitting manufacturer.

     B.   Fittings shall incorporate devices and methods to relieve
          electrical stresses and terminate wire shields.  Wire
          shielding shall be connected to a device (stress cone)
          which enables connection to an external grounding wire as
          part of each termination fitting.

     C.   Termination fittings shall be as manufactured by 3M only.

2.10 SPLICING

     A.   15 kv splices shall be University of Maryland Standard
          splice kits as manufactured by 3M.

     B.   All 15kv splices and terminations shall be performed by a
          certified cableman for this voltage class with no less than
          five (5) years experience.  Certification shall be made
          available upon request by the University.

2.11 FIREPROOFING

     A.   Provide tape fabricated of flexible, conformable fabric or
          organic composition coated on one side with flame retardant
          elastomer.  The tape shall be arc-proof, fireproof, 
          self-extinguishing, and shall not support combustion.  Tape
          shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, gases, salt
          water, sewage, or fungus; resistant to sunlight and
          ultraviolet light.  Finished application shall withstand
          200 amper arc for not less than 30 seconds.  Provide
          securing tape fabricated of glass cloth electrical tape not
          less than 7 mils thick and 3/4 inch wide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

     Upon receipt of the cable at the job site, the cable shall be 
     examined and stored in accordance with the Manufacturer's
     recommendations until ready for installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF CABLE IN CONDUIT

     A.   The entire conduit system or a portion thereof, between
          terminations of each conduit line shall be complete before
          installing the cables.

     B.   Conduit system shall be cleaned before pulling in cables.

     C.   Cables shall be carefully handled during installation so as
          to avoid mechanical injury to the conductor insulation or
          covering.

     D.   Use powdered soapstone.  Minerallac "Pull-in" Compound
          No.100 or Electro-Compound Company's "Y-er-eas" for pulling
          cable into conduit.  Do not use oil or grease for this
          purpose.

     E.   During the installation of cable, the minimum cable bending
          radius shall not be less than 12 times its outer diameter
          or the minimum dictated by the manufacturer and governing
          codes, whichever is greater.

     F.   During the pulling of cable into conduit, care shall be
          exercised not to exceed the Manufacturer's recommendations
          for maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.

     G.   Do not damage the cables as they are installed.  Use
          gripping devices and lubricants only as recommended by the
          wire manufacturer.  Do not exceed allowable tension limits
          as recommended by the manufacturer.  Prevent damage to
          outer jacket whenever possible.

     H.   Support the wire in the power manholes using non-metallic
          cable racks or approved equivalent devices.  Unsupported
          length shall not exceed 5'-10'.

3.03 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

     A.   Cables shall be continuous from point-to-point without
          splices or tapes.

     B.   There shall be no splices except those which have been
          requested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

     C.   Terminate wire (cable) - only in fittings which are
          designed by the fitting manufacturer as compatible with the
          particular wire to be terminated.  The wire shields at each
          termination point shall be grounded to the nearest
          grounding bus via #2 copper wire or equivalent in a copper
          braided conductor.

     D.   Include one copy of all data resulting from the factory
          tests required for each reel of cable in each "Maintenance
          Manual".

     E.   Compression type lugs and connectors shall be used for all
          splices and terminations.  The compression tooling and dies
          used shall be those recommended by the Manufacturer of the
          lugs and connectors.

     F.   Stress cones shall be used at each splice, tap, or
          termination.  The materials and methods used shall be those
          as recommended by the cable manufacturer.

3.04 INSTALLATION, FIREPROOFING

     A.   Cover all power cables located in manhole and junction
          boxes with arcproof and fireproof and self-extinguishing
          tape.

     B.   Apply tape in single layer, one-half lapped or as
          recommended by the manufacturer.  Install tape with coated
          side towards cable and extend it not less than one inch
          into each duct.

     C.   Secure tape in place with random wrap of glass cloth
          electrical tape not less than 7 mils thick and 3/4 inch
          wide.

3.05 FEEDER IDENTIFICATION

     A.   In all manholes, switchgear and switches install permanent
          tags on each feeder cable to clearly identify the voltage,
          installation date, UMCP Feeder designation, and phase. 
          Tags shall be as specified in Section 16050.  Position tags
          so they shall be easy to read after fireproofing is
          installed.  Tags shall be installed at all terminations and
          shall identify each phase of cable.  All nomenclature shall
          be as approved by the University of Maryland, prior to
          installation.

3.06 FIELD TESTING

     A.   All completed runs of medium voltage cable shall be
          subjected to a high voltage DC insulation resistance
          acceptance test prior to connection to the electrical
          distribution system.

     B.   The testing shall be performed by qualified personnel using
          methods and equipment in accordance with the cable
          Manufacturer's recommendations and the ICEA's standards and
          procedures.  The test shall be witnessed by the Owner or
          his representative.

     C.   Test reports shall be submitted to the UMCP Construction
          Manager immediately after completion of the testing.  The
          report shall be certified by the Contractor performing the
          test and shall indicate the methods and equipment used and
          the results obtained.



SECTION 16361                              AIR INTERRUPTER SWITCHES (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

     A.   Medium Voltage Air Interrupter Switches.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

     A.   Air Interrupter switch shall be used as a primary
          disconnect on the medium voltage.  The interrupter switch
          shall operate on a 13.2 KV, three-phase, 60 Hz system and
          shall be capable of making or breaking load currents.  The
          interrupting rating of high voltage fuse should be adequate
          to interrupt calculated value of short circuit at the
          location of the Air Interrupter Switch without damage to
          the switch.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

     A.   Submit shop drawings under the provisions of Section 16010. 
          submit shop drawings indicating outline dimensions,
          enclosure construction, shipping splits, lifting and
          supporting points, electrical single line diagram, and
          equipment electrical ratings.

     B.   Submit product data under the provisions of Sections 16010. 
          Submit product data for components and accessories.

     C.   Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under
          provisions of Section 16010.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

     A.   ANSI/IEEE 24 - Performance Characteristics and Dimensions
          for Outdoor Apparatus Bushings.

     B.   ANSI/IEEE 37.20 - Switchgear assemblies, including Metal
          Enclosed Bus.

     C.   IEEE 48 - Test Procedures and Requirements for High-Voltage
          AC Cable Terminations.

     D.   ANSI Z55.1 - Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and
          Equipment.

1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

     A.   Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of
          the General Conditions.  Include fuse replacement,
          adjustment, and lubrication instructions.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

     A.   Deliver products to site.

     B.   Accept interrupter switches on site and inspect for damage.

     C.   Protect interrupter switches from weather and moisture by
          covering with heavy plastic or canvas and by maintaining
          heat within enclosure in accordance with manufacturer's
          instructions.

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS

     A.   Provide two (2) sets of spare fuses of each size and rating
          and holders to accommodate the refills.

     B.   Submit two (2) insulated handle tools designed for pulling
          fuses.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

     A.   University standard switchgear for this type application is
          model PMU-19 manufactured by S&C Electric Company. 
          Contractor shall furnish, install and test PMU-19 as shown
          on the drawings.  No substitutions shall be permitted.

2.02 AIR INTERRUPTER SWITCHES

     A.   Switches: ANSI/IEEE C37.20;  Switchgear assembly including
          individual air interrupter switches in free-standing
          cubicles, securely bolted together to form an integrated
          structure.

     B.   System Voltage:  13.2 kV, three phase, 60 Hz.

     C.   Nominal voltage: 14.4 kV.

     D.   Maximum Design Voltage:  17 kV.

     E.   Basic Impulse Level: 95 kV.

     F.   Main Bus Ampacity:  600 amperes, continuous.

     G.   Short Circuit Rating:    Amperes RMS sym.       25000
                                   MVA three phase sym.   620
                                   at nominal voltage.

2.03 COMPONENTS

     A.   Voltage and Short Circuit Ratings:  Match ratings specified
          for integrated assembly.

     B.   Momentary Rating:  40 KA asymmetrical; 25 KA one-second
          symmetrical.

     C.   Fault Closing, two Time Duty Cycle:  40 KA rms
          asymmetrical; 25 KA rms symmetrical; 62.5 KA peak.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

     A.   Surge Arrestors:  Distribution class, rated 10 kV; mount in
          incoming line compartments.

     B.   Incoming Cable Terminations:  Clamp-type.

     C.   Provide Cable Fault indicators, door-mounted.

     D.   Provide permanently mounted operating handle, lockable in
          both positions.  Provide key interlocked fuse compartment
          door to prevent access to fuses until interrupter switch in
          compartment 4 is locked open.

     E.   Furnish and install padlocks for all lockable doors and
          lockable operating handles.  Locks shall be Best Company,
          with University standard cores and keys, no substitutions
          permitted.

     F.   Provide slide-in safety barriers, switch and fuse barriers,
          and switch and fuse grounding studs.

2.05 FABRICATION

     A.   Construction:  Weatherproof.

     B.   Provide chimney style roof.

     C.   Include continuous ground bus through switchgear assembly,
          securely connected to frame of each cubicle.

     D.   All Bus:  Copper.

2.06 FACTORY FINISHING

     A.   Finish Color:  ANSI Z55.1; Type 70 - Light Gray.

     B.   Apply corrosion-resisting primer to all surfaces.

2.07 MEDIUM VOLTAGE FUSES

     A.   Fuse:  Current Limiting type suitable for use outdoors in
          enclosure.

     B.   Fuse Rating:  E rated fuse, size as required to protect
          wire and transformer primary windings, complete with SM5
          power fuse holders, blown fuse indicators and wire refills.

     C.   Voltage:  14.4 KV or 15.5 KV.

     D.   Interrupting Rating:  25,000 amperes rms symmetrical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

     A.   Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

     B.   Verify field measurements are as instructed by the
          manufacturer.

     C.   Verify that required utilities are available, in proper
          location, and ready for use.

     D.   Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing
          surface conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

     A.   Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

     A.   Field inspection and testing will be performed under
          provisions of Section 16010.

     B.   Visually inspect for physical damage.

     C.   Perform mechanical operator tests in accordance with
          manufacturer's instructions.  check blade alignment and arc
          interrupter operations.

     D.   Perform insulation resistance test on each phase to ground
          and from each phase to each other phase.  Record results.

     E.   Perform AC or DC overpotential test to ANSI/IEEE 37.20.

     F.   Perform contact resistance test across each switch blade;
          report any contact resistance in excess of 50 microohms.

     G.   Verify key interlock operation.



SECTION 16400             480 VOLTS SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

     A.   Switchboards
     B.   Enclosed Safety Switches (Fused and Non-fused).
     C.   Fuses.
     D.   Dry type transformers.
     E.   Busway.
     F.   Panelboards.
     G.   Enclosed Circuit Breakers.
     H.   Motor Control Center.
     I.   Motor Starters.
     J.   Contactors

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

     A.   Electric Service System:  480Y/277 volts, three phase, four
          wire, 60 Hz.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

     A.   Shop Drawings:  Indicate relevant information on
          switchboards, panelboards, dry type transformers and
          starters.

     B.   Product Data:  Provide data on enclosed safety switches and
          enclosed circuit breakers, fuses, branch circuit breakers,
          transformers, motor starters, and contactors.  Submit trip
          current and let-through current curves for all circuit
          breakers.

     C.   Test Reports:  Submit for field inspection and testing. 
          Include description of procedures, duration, instruments
          used, and test values obtained.  Present information in
          table comparing acceptable values to actual values.

     D.   Operating and Maintenance Instructions:

          1.   Switchboard:  Submit NEMA PB 1.1.
          2.   Panelboard:  Submit NEMA PB 2.1.

1.04 REFERENCES AND REGULATION REQUIREMENTS

     Conform To The Requirements of the Following:

     A.   NEC  -    National Electrical Code.
     B.   NEMA -    AB1, PB1, ST20, PB2, ICS-2-322.
     C.   ANSI -    Z55.1, C37.
     D.   UL   -    50, 67, 198-2, 891, 845.
     E.   ASTM -    B187.
     F.   IEEE -    Std 80, 141, 241, 242, 493.
     G.   Refer to Division 1 for standards applicable and made part
          of this specification.

1.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

     A.   Each item listed in this section shall be UL listed.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

     A.   Mark each enclosed circuit breaker, enclosed safety switch,
          panel board, switchboard and transformer etc. in accordance
          with applicable standards.

     B.   Ship each unit securely packaged and labelled for safe
          handling and to avoid damage or distortion.

     C.   Store products in secure and dry storage facility.

1.07 MAINTENANCE

     A.   Submit extra materials required for maintenance:

          1.   Provide two sets of each size and type of fuses.

1.08 EQUIPMENT RATING

     A.   All equipment shall be capable of withstanding the
          mechanical stresses and heat due to the maximum short
          circuit current available at the equipment location.

     B.   Series rated equipment or devices shall not be acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 480 VOLTS SWITCHBOARD

     A.   Manufacturers:

          1.   General Electric Company

          2.   Westinghouse Electric Corporation

          3.   Square D.

     B.   Switchboard:  NEMA PB2.

          1.   Line and Load Terminations:  Accessible from front
               only of switchboard, suitable for conductor materials
               used.

          2.   Main Section Devices:  The main circuit breaker shall
               be individually mounted.

          3.   Distribution Section Devices:  Panel mounted and the
               number of breakers shall be as shown on the one-line
               diagram.

     C.   Ratings:

          1.   480Y/277 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire.

          2.   Main bus ampacity:  As shown on drawings.

     D.   Switching and Over-current Protective Devices:

          1.   Molded case circuit breakers, NEMA AB1.  Fused switch
               or switch and fuse and series rated are not
               acceptable.

     E.   Bussing:

          1.   Bus Material:  98% conductivity Copper ASTM B187,
               sized in accordance with NEMA PB 2. 

          2.   Bus Connections:  Accessible from front for
               maintenance.

          3.   Provide copper ground bus of not less than 1/4 inch by
               2 inch to extend the entire length of the switchboard.

          4.   Bus Contact Surfaces:  Silver plated at connections
               and joints.  Splicing connections in the buses and tap
               connections to the buses shall be drilled and machined
               before the contact surfaces are silver plated.

          5.   Neutral Bus Rating:  Same as that of phase bus.

          6.   Control Bus:  120 Volts A.C., Copper, 6 AWG minimum,
               with UL Class J or RK-5 fuses.

     F.   Future Provisions:

          1.   Spaces for future devices shall be fully equipped with
               continuous current rated bussing and provisions for
               bus connection.

          2.   Provide 15% spare breakers and 15% space.  All spares
               shall be rated for 600A frame, 400A trip.

     G.   Low Voltage Wiring:

          1.   All low voltage control wiring shall be stranded
               copper flameproof switchboard type, No. 14 AWG
               minimum.  Extra flexible stranding shall be used for
               connections passing around hinges or swinging doors or
               panels.  Where subject to abrasion, cables shall be
               provided with protective sheathing.

     H.   Enclosure:

          1.   Dead-front, free-standing indoor steel enclosure. 
               NEMA Type-1 General Purpose.

          2.   Steel structure with framework of welded or bolted
               structural steel, free from distortion and welding
               strain and sufficiently rigid to support equipment
               under normal and short circuit conditions.

          3.   Each Breaker Compartment shall be equipped with hinged
               door or bolted cover in front and bolted rear cover. 
               Bolted covers shall be furnished with headed studs and
               key hole slots for hanging in position before bolting.

          4.   Circuit breakers shall be externally operable. 
               Highest breaker handle shall not be more than six feet
               six inches above finished floor.

          5.   Spaces for future breakers shall include all necessary
               bus connections and device supports.  Do not taper
               main bus rating.

          6.   Height:  90 inches, excluding floor sills, lifting
               members, and pull boxes.

          7.   Finish:  Manufacturer's standard ANSI light gray
               enamel over entire external surfaces.

          8.   Pull Box: Extend the switchboard enclosure to provide
               wire pulling & bending space.

          9.   The entire switchboard structure shall be mounted on
               a steel base to insure proper adjustment of all units
               and be suitable for mounting on level floor.

2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES

     A.   Manufacturers:

          1.   Square D.

          2.   Westinghouse Electric Corporation.

          3.   General Electric Company.

     B.   Enclosed Fusible Safety Switch Assemblies:  NEMA KS 1; Type
          HD.  Quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed
          knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to
          prevent opening the front cover with the switch in the ON
          position.  The handle shall be lockable in the OFF
          position.

          1.   Fuse clips:  Designed to accommodate Class R & J
               fuses.

     C.   Enclosed Nonfusible Safety Switch Assemblies:  NEMA KS 1;
          Type HD.  Quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter
          enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle
          interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in
          the ON position.  The Handle shall be lockable in the OFF
          position.

     D.   Enclosures:  NEMA KS1; Type 1 for indoor applications and
          nema type 4 for outdoor applications.

2.03 FUSES

     A.   Manufacturers:

               1.   Bussman.

               2.   Gould Shawmut.

               3.   Reliance.

     B.   Fuses 600 Amperes and Less:  Current limiting type.   
          One-time fuse, 600 volt.

     C.   Fuse Interrupting Rating:  200,000 rms amperes.

2.04 TRANSFORMERS

     A.   Manufacturers:

          1.   Square D.

          2.   Westinghouse Electric Corporation.

          3.   General Electric Company.

     B.   Description:  Enclosed air-cooled dry type transformers.

     C.   Ratings:

          1.   Primary Voltage:  480 volts, three phase.  (Delta 3
               wire).

          2.   Secondary Voltage:  208Y/120 volts.  (Wye 4 wire).

          3.   Capacity:  To be determind by the designer in
               accordance with the project requirements.

          4.   Basic Impulse Level:  10 kV.

          5.   Insulation Class/Temperature Rise:  Class 220 degrees
               C.

     D.   Configuration:  delta-wye, copper winding.

     E.   Winding Taps:  Four full capacity primary taps, each at 2.5
          percent below rated voltage; and two full capacity primary
          taps, each at 2.5 percent above rated voltage.  

     F.   Mounting:  Floor.

     G.   Enclosure:  Indoor.

     H.   All conductive components shall be made of copper.

2.05 BUSWAY

     A.   Manufacturers:

          1.   General Electric Company

          2.   Square D Company.

          3.   Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc..

     B.   Plug-In Busway:  NEMA BU1; plug-in busway with non-
          ventilated housing.

          1.   Voltage:  277/480 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz.

          2.   Withstand Rating:  200,000 amperes, rms symmetrical.

     C.   Conductors:  Copper; full neutral.  Provide ground bus.

     D.   Plug-in Units:  Provide hinged door and operating handle
          for stick operation.

     E.   Joints:  Provide single bolt type, with silver-plated
          contact surface for bus and splice plate.

     F.   Provide fittings in accordance with manufacturer's
          instructions.

     G.   Finish:  Baked gray enamel.

2.06 PANELBOARDS

     A.   Manufacturers:

          1.   Square D Company.

          2.   General Electric Company

          3.   Westinghouse Electric Corporation.

     B.   Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards:

          1.   NEMA PB 1; circuit breaker type.

          2.   Enclosure:  NEMA PB1; Type 1.

          3.   Provide surface cabinet front with concealed trim
               clamps, concealed hinge and flush lock, all keyed
               alike.  Finish in manufacturer's standard gray.

          4.   Bus:  Copper bus (Aluminum not acceptable), ratings
               shall be determined by the designer in accordance with
               the project requirements.

          5.   Ground Bus:  Copper.

          6.   Voltage:  208Y/120 and 480Y/277 volts, three phase,
               four wire.

          7.   Minimum Integrated Equipment Rating:  Based on
               available short circuit current at the panel location.

     C.   Accessories:  Provide bolt-on circuit breakers, ratings of
          the circuit breakers to be determined on the basis of
          connected load.  All panelboards shall have main circuit
          breakers.  Plug-in type circuit breakers shall not be
          acceptable.  Provide 20% spare capacity for the panels (10%
          spare breakers and 10% spaces for future use).

2.07 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

     A.   Manufacturers:

          1.   General Electric Company

          2.   Westinghouse Electric Corporation.

          3.   Square D Company.

     B.   Circuit Breaker:  NEMA AB 1.

          1.   Voltage, poles, amperes, configuration, interrupting
               ratings, enclosure, and accessories to be determined
               by the designer in accordance with the project
               requirements.

2.08 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER

     A.   Manufacturers:

          1.   Westinghouse Electric Corporation

          2.   Square D Company

          3.   General Electric Company

     B.   The motor control center shall be suitable for operation on
          a 480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hertz system, having a
          short circuit capacity equal to the maximum symmetrical
          short circuit current available at the motor control center
          location.

     C.   The motor control center shall be housed in NEMA Type 1
          enclosure.  The units shall be front mounting and shall be
          accessible from the front.  The motor control center shall
          consist of specified number of vertical sections joined
          together to form a rigid completely dead front, free
          standing structure suitable for floor mounting.

     D.   The number of spare units and space provided shall be 10%
          each, with a minimum of two.  The spare breakers shall be
          200A frame, 100A trip.

     E.   Space compartments shall also be provided where necessary
          to fill out and complete the arrangement for the most
          practical and economical design.

     F.   Space compartments shall be made with provision for the
          future installation of combination starters in the largest
          size that the compartment will accommodate, and shall be
          fitted with all necessary hardware to receive the future
          units.

     G.   Horizontal wiring troughs shall be provided at the top and
          bottom of the motor control center and provision shall be
          made for racking and securing cables therein.

     H.   Troughs shall be large enough to permit the making of bends
          in the power cables with a minimum radius of ten (10) times
          the largest cable diameter.

     I.   Both wiring troughs are to be accessible from the front and
          removable plates for cable entrance shall be provided.

     J.   Vertical Sections:

          1.   Each vertical section shall be approximately 90-inches
               high, 20-inches wide and not less than 20-inches deep.

          2.   Each vertical section shall be constructed from cold
               rolled steel sheets of not less than 12 gauge,
               suitably reinforced, bolted, and welded so as to
               provide rigid support for the enclosed equipment.

          3.   Each vertical section shall have a 3 phase, horizontal
               main bus.  Any section containing a vertical portion
               of this main bus for infeed connections shall also
               have the same rating.

          4.   Each vertical section shall be designed such that
               adjacent sections are completely isolated from each
               other.  Safety features shall include front entry
               vertical bus barriers with covers for the unit stab
               cutouts, and steel barriers between the units and the
               wireway.  PVC barriers are not acceptable.

          5.   Each vertical section shall be accessible from the
               front for wiring and shall be designed such that
               wiring can be done from the front without removing any
               of the individual units within the vertical section.

          6.   Each vertical section shall be divided into
               compartments as required by the control units mounted
               therein.

     K.   Main Horizontal Bus

          1.   Power shall be distributed by means of a continuous
               horizontal bus with a current rating of 600 amperes
               and shall be tin-plated copper.

          2.   The main bus shall be edgewise mounted, one above the
               other and supported on polyester reinforced
               insulators.

          3.   The main bus shall be isolated by steel barriers from
               wire troughs, motor starters and other areas.

          4.   All main bus and splice bar connections shall be
               accessible from the front.

          5.   Main bus splicing between shipping splits shall be
               accomplished from the front without any structural
               disassembly being required.

          6.   Provision shall be made for the extension of the
               horizontal main bus when additional sections are added
               in either direction.

          7.   All main buses, insulators, and their supports shall
               be designed and constructed to withstand the
               mechanical stresses of the electro-magnetic forces
               imposed by the maximum RMS symmetrical short circuit
               current available.

          8.   All main buses shall be designed to carry not less
               than the total load in amperes continuously without
               exceeding the temperature rise permitted by the
               standards based on an outside ambient temperature or
               40  C.

     L.   Vertical Bus

          1.   The vertical bus and plug in clips shall be rated 300
               amperes and shall be copper, tin-plated.  Splicing
               connections in the buses and tap connections to the
               buses shall be drilled or punched before the contact
               surfaces are plated.

          2.   Flame retardant insulating material barriers shall be
               supplied in front of the vertical bus to provide
               protection against accidental contact and isolation
               from unit compartments.

          3.   Insulating covers shall be provided on both ends of
               the vertical bus to protect against accidental contact
               by fish-tapes or other tools.

     M.   Ground Bus

          1.   The motor control center shall have a tin-plated
               copper ground bus bonded to the structure and extended
               over its full length.  The ground bus shall have holes
               on approximately 2 inch centers to allow for the
               connection of ground cables.  Provision shall be made
               for the extension of ground bus in the future.

          2.   Vertical tin-plated copper ground bus which is solidly
               connected to the horizontal ground bus shall be
               provided in each vertical section.

     N.   Neutral Bus

          1.   A horizontal full size, tin-plated copper neutral bus
               shall be provided continuous through the motor control
               center.  Lugs of appropriate capacity shall be
               furnished.

     O.   Unit Construction

          1.   The front panel of each Motor Control Center
               compartment shall be hinged in order to provide proper
               inspection maintenance and/or removal of each control
               unit.

          2.   Each door of each compartment shall be hinged on the
               left side and open a minimum of 90  and shall remain
               in place when the unit is removed to protect the
               vertical bus.

          3.   Each compartment door shall be secured by means of 1/4
               turn latches.  Removable hinge pins shall be provided
               to permit fast and easy removal of the door.

          4.   Neoprene gasketing shall be provided on all doors and
               all operating handles and cover plates.

          5.   Removable steel plates shall be provided for access to
               the bus connections and other equipment as required.

          6.   Guide rails shall be provided for supporting the
               control units.

          7.   Each compartment shall be baffled and isolated from
               adjacent units.  Unit partitions shall be easily
               removable and insertable in every height module.

          8.   All accessories such as control power transformer,
               current transformers, relays, etc., shall be installed
               in the motor starter compartment.

          9.   An operating handle shall be externally mounted on the
               compartment door of the enclosure.  This mechanism
               shall be engaged with the breaker at all times
               regardless of the compartment door position.

          10.  The unit door to each compartment shall be
               mechanically interlocked with the operating handle of
               the respective switch or breaker.

          11.  A screw driver defeaer shall be provided for opening
               the door without opening the switch, for testing, and
               maintenance purposes.  The contacts shall open when
               the circuit breaker opens.  Each operating mechanism
               shall be designed to allow padlocking in the off
               position.

     P.   Motor starters shall be as specified in Article 2.09 of
          this section.

     Q.   Wiring Requirement

          1.   The wiring shall be NEMA Class I, type C.

          2.   Terminal blocks shall be 600 volt, medium duty,
               suitable for channel mounting.  Space terminal blocks
               shall be included so as to supply a minimum of five
               spare terminal points.

          3.   The control wiring shall be 600 volt, copper #14 AWG,
               or larger, flame and moisture resistant SIS
               switchboard wire.  The conductor shall be stranded for
               fixed wiring and extra flexible hinge type for wiring
               across door hinges or swinging panels.

          4.   All internal wiring shall be terminated using
               insulated ring type lugs.  Terminal blocks and jumpers
               shall be provided for wiring which crosses shipping
               splits and shall be heavy duty type.

          5.   Terminal block markings shall be standard and
               provisions for Owner to mark unused terminal block
               points in the field shall be made.  Control wires
               shall be marked in accordance with manufacturers
               wiring diagram for each control unit.

          6.   A unit wiring diagram shall be placed in a pocket on
               the inside of each compartment door.

     R.   Finish and Painting

          1.   All external welds shall be ground smooth and all
               sharp corners eliminated.

          2.   All surfaces shall be clean and smooth and cleared of
               all blemishes before application of the finish.

          3.   Steel enclosures shall be bonderized or otherwise
               rust-proofed by an equivalent process, followed by a
               finishing coat of durable baked enamel.

          4.   The motor control center shall be painted in
               accordance with manufacturer's standard procedure.

          5.   The motor control center standard color shall be ANSI
               61 gray.

          6.   The interior color of drawer units, partitions, and
               vertical wiring troughs shall be white.

          7.   A can of touch-up paint in each color shall be
               provided.

2.09 MOTOR STARTERS

     A.   General

          1.   Manufacturers:

               a.   Westinghouse Electric Corporation

               b.   Square D Company

               c.   General Electric Company

          2.   Each motor shall be provided with a motor starter of
               proper design to meet the requirements of the motor
               and drive.  Starters shall be specified in this
               section unless modified by other sections of these
               sections.  all starters shall be of the same
               manufacturer.

          3.   Starters not located in the motor control center,
               shall have NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures for
               indoor applications and NEMA Type 4 for outdoor
               applications.  The enclosures shall be suitable for
               padlocking.  The enclosure shall be so designed such
               that entire starter can be readily removed and of
               sufficient size to permit easy access for repair,
               replacement and connections.  Starters shall be
               arranged for all, floor or panel mounting and shall be
               complete with necessary frames and supports.

          4.   Starters shall be equipped with contacts to break each
               ungrounded line to the motor.  For three phase motors,
               three thermal overcurrent devices, ambient compensate,
               shall be provided to open all contacts simultaneously. 
               A suitable reset device for resetting overcurrent trip
               shall be provided.  Overcurrent device shall be rated
               in amperes to correspond to the motor nameplate rating
               but the rating shall not exceed that recommended by
               the motor manufacturer for the application.  Control
               circuit conductors shall be connected and protected
               against overcurrent in accordance with the with the
               requirements of the National Electrical Code and they
               shall be arranged so that an accidental ground will
               not start the motor.  Control circuits and indicating
               lights shall be on 120 volts provided where necessary
               by individual dry type control power transformers of
               adequate capacity located within the starters.  The
               control power transformers shall be protected by fuses
               on the primary side.  Overcurrent devices shall be
               circuit breakers with interrupting rating not less
               than the maximum available RMS symmetrical short
               circuit current.

          5.   Each starter shall have a horsepower rating not less
               than the rating of the motor it controls.  The
               starters and all their related component parts shall
               be designed and properly coordinated for the rating
               and characteristics of the motors furnished under the
               various sections of the specifications.

          6.   Door mounted control accessories shall be heavy duty,
               oil tight type with nameplates.  Indicating lights
               shall have oil tight covers (red, green, and amber)
               and shall be clearly visible.

     B.   Manual Motor Starters:

          1.   Manual starters shall be provided for all motors under
               1/2 horsepower which are manually controlled.  Manual
               starters shall be equipped with a manually operated
               trip free switch.  A separately mounted safety
               disconnect switch shall be provided unless containing
               disconnect and circuit protection for the motor.  Oil
               tight Hand-Off Automatic selector switches shall be
               provided where starters are controlled by automatic
               devices.  The functions, locations, etc., shall be as
               specified under magnetic starters.  Starters shall be
               NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A manually
               operated, full-voltage controller with overload relay,
               red pilot light, Normally Opened (NO), Normally Closed
               (NC) auxiliary contacts, and push button operator.

          2.   Fractional Horsepower Manual Starter:  NEMA ICS 2; AC
               general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage 
               controller for fractional horsepower induction
               motors, with thermal overload unit, red and green
               pilot light, and toggle operator.

          3.   Motor Starting Switch:  NEMA ICS 2; AC general purpose
               Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller for
               fractional horsepower induction motors, without
               thermal overload unit, red pilot light, normally open
               and normally closed auxiliary contacts and toggle
               operator.

     C.   Magnetic Motor Starters:  NEMA ICS 2

          1.   Magnetic starters shall be provided for motors 1.2
               horsepower and overcontrolled by automatic devices
               and/or manually controlled.  Magnetic starters shall
               be full voltage (across the line) type with circuit
               breaker within the starter case except where the
               starter is full visible and not over 50 feet from the
               panelboard/motor control center having individual
               disconnect and circuit protection for the motor.

          2.   Magnetic starters shall be provided with manual start-stop 
               buttons mounted on starter case, unless automatic
               devices are specified.  Starters controlled by
               automatic devices shall be provided with oil-tight
               Hand-Off-Automatic selector switch mounted on starter
               case, and connected so motor can be manually operated
               regardless of the position of the automatic control
               devices.  Selector switch shall not be connected to
               supersede any safety device or safety interlock.

          3.   Magnetic starters shall be AC general purpose, Class
               A, magnetic controller for induction motors rated in
               horse power.  The coil operating voltage shall be 120
               volts, 60 hertz frequency, single phase.  Provide 2
               normally open and 2 normally closed contacts (field
               convertible).

          4.   Full voltage starter shall be reversing or non-
               reversing type as required by CDT design.  Reduced
               voltage starter shall be autotransformer type. 
               Reversing starters shall be mechanically interlocked
               to prevent simultaneous operation of both the
               "forward" and "reverse" coils.

     D.   Combination Motor Starters:  Combine motor starters with
          motor circuit protectors.

     E.   Interlocking or sequence starting of motors:  Where
          interlocking or sequence starting of motors are specified,
          it shall be done in a manner that when the main switch or
          breaker on any starter is open no part of the starter will
          be left alive.  The Contractor shall furnish all equipment,
          such as relays or auxiliary switches on breakers or
          disconnect switches, necessary to accomplish the foregoing. 
          No unprotected cross connection shall be made between the
          holding coil of one starter and the auxiliary contacts of
          another starter.

     F.   Two Speed Motor Starters:  Starters for two-speed motors
          shall be designed for use with two speed motors having two
          separate windings.  Starters shall have two separate sets
          of interlocked contacts and shall have under voltage and
          over-current protection for each winding.  Manual control
          stations shall be of the three button type, with "Slow",
          "Fast", and "Stop" positions.

2.10 CONTACTORS

     A.   General Purpose Contactors:  NEMA ICS 2; electrically
          operated, mechanically held.

          1.   Coil Operating Voltage:  120 volts, 60 Hz.

          2.   Enclosure:  NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 for indoor applications
               and type 4 for outdoor applications.

     B.   Lighting Contactors:  NEMA ICS 2; electrically operated,
          mechanically held.

          1.   Coil Operating Voltage:  120 volts, 60 Hz.

          2.   Enclosure:  NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 for indoor purpose and
               type 4 for outdoor applications.

          3.   Provide bus terminals suitable for panelboard
               mounting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION, INSTALLATION, AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

     A.   Switchboard

          1.   Installation

               a.   Install in accordance with manufacturers
                    instructions and approved shop drawings.

               b.   Install conduit, raceway, and ducts in accordance
                    with Section 16110.

               c.   Make power cable and control wire connections as
                    follows:

                    Make power cable and control wire connections to
                    molded-case circuit breakers by means of integral
                    mechanical connectors.  IF such items are not
                    furnished with integral mechanical connectors,
                    make connections using compression connectors.

               d.   Make grounding connections in accordance with
                    NEC.

          2.   Field Quality Control

               a.   Field Testing and Inspection

                    1.   General Requirements

                         (a)  Conduct field testing and inspection
                              at the switchboard to ensure proper
                              operation of equipment provided.

                         (b)  Relay and trip device settings:  The
                              Contractor is responsible for setting
                              protective relays and trip devices in
                              accordance with an approved
                              coordination study and their
                              calibration for proper operation
                              during field testing.

                    2.   Field Inspection

                         (a)  Prior to field testing, check
                              equipment installation in accordance
                              with manufacturer's recommendations
                              and IEEE 141 including, but not
                              limited to, verification of the
                              following:

                         (b)  Integrity of bus insulation.

                         (c)  Tightness of connections.

                         (d)  Adequate support of bus bars.

                         (e)  Correct grounding, anchoring, and
                              alignment of switchgear in accordance
                              with manufacturer's drawings.

                         (f)  Ease of racking drawout breakers in
                              and out their respective cubicles.

                         (g)  Physical interchangeability of similar
                              circuit breakers.

                         (h)  Adjustment of circuit breaker contact
                              or interrupter switch.

                         (i)  Functioning of interlock and closing
                              of safety shutter with breaker in
                              disconnect or withdrawn positions.

                         (j)  Tightness of bolted bus joints by
                              calibrated-torque-wrench method, based
                              on manufacturer's recommended values.

                         (k)  Calibrate protective devices/relays
                              and set them in accordance with an
                              approved coordination study.

                    3.   Field Testing

                         (a)  Furnish equipment required to perform
                              tests.

                         (b)  Provide the services of a
                              manufacturer's engineering
                              representative to support the
                              electrical testing company.  Conduct
                              tests in the presence of the Engineer. 
                              For each item, submit for approval and
                              perform approved tests including, but
                              not limited to, those specified.

                         (c)  Perform insulation resistance test of
                              60-second duration in accordance with
                              the following requirements:

                              (1)  Test Voltage

                                   Voltage Rating:  150-600 volts
                                                    1,000 volts

                              (2)  Insulation resistance:  kV rating
                                   plus one megohm but not less than
                                   minimum value recommended by
                                   manufacturer.

                              (3)  Do not perform dielectric
                                   withstand test unless insulation
                                   resistance is equal to or greater
                                   than the minimum value specified.

                              (4)  Perform insulation resistance
                                   test between phase-to-phase and
                                   phase-to-ground.

                         (d)  Test grounding conductors and
                              enclosures for continuity to the
                              electrical room grounding system.

                         (e)  Test protective relays and trip
                              devices, except power fuses in
                              accordance with IEEE 141 procedures,
                              modified as necessary, for compliance
                              with an approved coordination study.

                         (f)  Test operation of each circuit and
                              control in accordance with approved
                              sequence.

                         (g)  Test interlock system as follows:

                              (1)  Make closure attempt on locked
                                   open devices.

                              (2)  Make opening attempt on locked
                                   closed devices.

                         (h)  Test current transformer circuits for
                              polarity, ratio, and protective device
                              operation by secondary injection
                              method.

                         (i)  Perform functional tests on control,
                              interlocking, blocking and supervisory
                              circuits.  Include verification of all
                              interconnections between each
                              equipment and interface points.

     B.   Panelboard and Enclosed Circuit Breaker

          1.   Installation

               a.   Install panelboards at locations shown, with
                    bottom of the panel not less than 12 inches above
                    finished floor.

               b.   Mount panelboards with their fronts straight and
                    plumb.

               c.   When a feeder serves more than one panelboard or
                    panelboard section, install separate junction
                    boxes or provide adequate gutter area for
                    termination of feeders and bus taps.

               d.   Connect all branch circuit wires.  Connect the
                    neutral wire of each branch circuit to the
                    neutral bar in the panelboard.

               e.   Make conduit connections in accordance with
                    Section 16110.

               f.   Make all power cable connections to circuit
                    breakers, fused switch units, neutral and ground
                    bus bars in panelboards and load centers, and
                    enclosed circuit breakers, by means of integral
                    mechanical connectors.  If such items are not
                    furnished with integral mechanical connectors,
                    make all connections using compression
                    connectors.

               g.   Ground panelboards and enclosed circuit breaker
                    enclosures in accordance with the NEC.

               h.   Apply matching touchup paint where necessary.

          2.   Directory of Circuits:

               a.   Furnish each panelboard and load center with
                    legibly type printed circuit directories located
                    on the inside of each of the enclosures.

          3.   Field Quality Control:

               Field tests shall be performed by an independent
               electric testing company.

               a.   Molded case circuit breakers:  Pole-to-pole and
                    pole-to-ground insulation resistance tests with
                    1,000 volt dc megger.  Insulation resistance
                    shall be 50 megohms minimum.

               b.   Insulation resistance tests of each bus section
                    phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for one minute
                    using 1,000 volt megger.  Insulation resistance
                    shall not be less than manufacturer's recommended
                    minimum or two megohms minimum.

               c.   Test circuit connections in accordance with
                    wiring diagrams.
               d.   Test panelboard enclosures for continuity to the
                    grounding system.

               e.   Check cable connections to each circuit breaker
                    for tightness.

               f.   Check the setting of all adjustable magnetic
                    trips for compliance with an approved
                    coordination study.

          C.   Dry Type Transformers

               1.   Installation:

                    a.   Install each transformer in the location
                         and position as shown and in accordance
                         with manufacturer's recommendations.

                    b.   Make all power conductor connections in
                         accordance with manufacturer's
                         recommendations.

                    c.   Ground each transformer in accordance with
                         NEC, NESC, and IEEE.

          D.   Motor Control Center

               1.   Installation:

                    a.   Install motor control center in the
                         location and position as shown and in
                         accordance with manufacturer's
                         recommendations.

                    b.   Install conduit, raceway and ducts in
                         accordance with Section 16110.

                    c.   Make grounding connections in accordance
                         with NEC, NESC, and IEEE.

               2.   Field Quality Control

                    a.   Field Inspection:  Prior to field testing,
                         check each equipment installation in
                         accordance with manufacturer's
                         recommendations, but not limited to,
                         verification of the following:

                         (1)  Integrity of all bus insulation.

                         (2)  Tightness (torque) of all connections.

                         (3)  Adequate support of all bus bars.

                         (4)  Correct grounding, anchoring and
                              alignment in accordance with
                              manufacturer's drawings.

                         (5)  Tightness (torque) of all bolted bus
                              joints by calibrated-torque-wrench
                              method, based on manufacturer's
                              recommended values.

               3.   Field Testing

                    a.   Furnish the equipment required to perform
                         all tests.

                    b.   Provide the services of a manufacturer's
                         engineering representative to support the
                         electrical testing company.  Conduct all
                         tests in the presence of the Engineer.  For
                         each item, submit for approval and perform
                         approved tests including, but not limited
                         to, those specified.

                    c.   Testing shall be conducted in accordance
                         with NEMA ICS-2.

                    d.   Perform insulation resistance test between
                         phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.

                    e.   Test all grounding conductors and
                         enclosures for continuity to the electrical
                         room grounding system.

                    f.   Test the operation of each circuit and
                         control in accordance with an approved
                         sequence.

                    g.   Perform functional tests on all control,
                         interlocking, blocking, and supervisory
                         circuits.  This shall include verification
                         of all interconnections between each
                         equipment and interface points.

3.02 CLEANING

     A.   Clean all equipment:  busses; insulators; and finishes, to
          remove dust, dirt, paint, and/or any concrete splatters
          prior to energization.  Continuous housekeeping shall be
          maintained after energization.  Prior to acceptance by the
          University, this cleaning shall be repeated, at
          contractor's cost.



SECTION 16411                    UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS AND DUCTBANKS (2.15.97)


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

     A.   Underground raceways.

     B.   Formation of ductbanks.

     C.   Concrete.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

     A.   Underground raceways and ductbanks for medium voltage power
          conductors, service conductors and communications systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

     A.   Submit product data under the provisions of Division I,
          "General Requirements" indicating the size of raceways,
          reinforcing bars, reinforcing wires and concrete materials.

     B.   Indicate the location of ductbank.

1.04 REFERENCES

     A.   ASTM A-185.

     B.   ASTM A-165, grade 60.

     C.   ASTM D-1752, Type II.

     D.   NEMA TC 2.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

     A.   Submit an accurate record of the exact location of all
          ductbanks.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAYS

     A.   Raceways shall be PVC Schedule 40 with Rigid Metallic
          Conduit turnups to all points above grade (or at grade) or
          where penetrating a wall (i.e., at manholes) or the
          vertical surface of a structure which is not part of and
          not supported as part of the ductbank or underground
          raceway.

     B.   PVC raceway (Polyvinyl Chloride Raceway) shall be rated for
          90 degree C. and shall be U.L. listed for concrete
          encasement.  PVC raceway shall be as manufactured by Carlon
          or an approved equal.

2.02 CONCRETE

     A.   Provide concrete material for electrical work as part of
          the electrical work, and all concrete provided shall be
          3000 psi concrete, or better.

2.03 REINFORCING

     A.   Reinforcing bars shall be steel conforming to ASTM A-165,
          grade 60.  Bars shall be free of loose scale, rust, or
          other coatings that will reduce bond.

2.04 EXPANSION JOINTS

     A.   Expansion joints shall be "Dylite" as manufactured by
          Copper Scorogord or Down Chemical and shall conform to ASTM
          D-1752, Type II.

2.05 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

     A.   Construction joints shall be formed using "Jahn" Screed
          Joint materials as manufactured by Superior Concrete
          Accessories, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

     A.   All underground raceways shall be encased in concrete (3
          inches minimum) over their entire length and where these
          raceways are grouped to form a ductbank (2 or more ducts)
          the ductbank shall be steel reinforced.  Where raceways are
          not part of a reinforced concrete ductbank, they shall be
          RMC raceways encased in concrete.

     B.   Raceways and ductbanks for "Power" wiring shall not be
          combined with raceways and ductbanks for "Communication"
          wiring.  Where "Power" wiring raceways are run adjacent to
          "Communication" wiring raceways, the concrete encasing each
          type shall be separated with a minimum separation of 12
          inches.  (See Section 16741)

     C.   Underground raceways shall be schedule 40 PVC raceways
          except where they penetrate the wall of a manhole, building
          wall, or equipment mounting pad, or where they are not part
          of a reinforced ductbank.

     D.   Where each raceway penetrates the wall of a manhole,
          building floor, or equipment mounting pad, it shall be RMC
          raceway and this segment of raceway shall be at least 5
          feet long.  The exposed end shall terminate in a flush
          coupling which shall be plugged when the raceway is empty. 
          The portion in the wall or pad shall be sealed tightly in
          place with non-shrinking cement grout.  The underground
          portion shall be joined to the rest of the underground
          raceway via a watertight coupling.

     E.   Provide expansion joint material between the raceway
          encasement and the outer wall of a manhole or between
          raceway encasement and any other permanent structure.

     F.   Underground raceways and ductbank shall be installed at
          least 30 inches below finished grade or paving at any
          point.  The 30 inches shall be measured from the top of the
          concrete encasement of the raceway.  They shall be laid to
          a minimum grade of 6 inches per 100 feet to drain into
          manhole whenever possible.  Changes in direction shall be
          accomplished with long sweep bends and the minimum bend
          radius shall equal to or exceed the values scheduled in the
          NEC for rigid metal conduit for lead sheathed wire and
          where ductbanks cross other ductbanks there shall be a
          separation of at least 12 inches vertically.

     G.   Ductbank configuration shall be as indicated.  The minimum
          encasement shall be 3 inches and the minimum cover for
          reinforcing shall be 3/4 inches.  Raceway and reinforcing
          shall be inspected in place and approved by the University
          its designated representative prior to placing the encasing
          concrete.

     H.   When placing concrete around raceways, adjust delivery
          ducts to insure that the fall of concrete is as short as
          possible and use a splash board to direct the flow away
          from trench sides and avoid dislodging soil and stones into
          the trench.  When placing concrete, encase from a fixed end
          to a free end and allow for expansion or contraction of the
          raceway as the concrete is placed and cured.

          Use a "First Pour" method which provides a layer of
          concrete under the bottom of the lowest raceway at any
          point in any cross section before completing the pour tot
          eh top at the encasement.

     I.   Raceways shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying and
          during construction the ends shall be plugged to keep the
          interior clean.

     J.   Provide a 3/16 inch diameter nylon pull rope in each unused
          duct.

     K.   The bottom of each ductbank or raceway encasement shall be
          supported on undisturbed earth, or compacted ground over
          undisturbed earth, and backfilling shall not be done until
          the concrete has cured for at least three days.  Exposed
          surfaces of concrete shall be kept wet (damp) throughout
          the three days curing period.

     L.   Provide Record Set data of the actual elevation of the top
          of each end of each raceway or ductbank at the midpoint, at
          no more than 100 foot intervals, where changes in elevation
          are less than 2 feet between data points or 10 feet
          intervals when the elevation between intervals is different
          by 2 feet or more between data points.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

     A.   Field inspection and testing shall be performed under
          provisions of section 16010 in the presence of the
          Engineer.

     B.   Backfilling shall not be done until the concrete has cured
          for at least three calendar days.

     C.   Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be kept wet (damp)
          throughout the three days curing period.



SECTION 16412                                              MANHOLES (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

     A.   The general provision of the Contract, including General
          and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply
          to work specified in this section.

          1.   The requirements of Section 16010.  Electrical general
               provisions shall apply to work specified under this
               section.

1.02 SCOPE

     A.   Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services
          necessary to provide manholes as indicated.

     B.   Each manhole shall include at least the following:  cast
          iron cover and rim, masonry collar between the cast iron
          cover rim and the manhole, drain field opening, drain
          field, grounding rod, support members for wire or cable,
          and ladder.

     C.   The Contractor shall be responsible for the structural
          integrity of each manhole as installed - including its
          associated components such as:  bearing capacity of the
          coil or fill supporting it, cast iron cover and rim,
          masonry collar, manhole and openings through manhole
          surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANHOLES

     A.   Manholes shall be reinforced concrete with minimum inside
          dimensions as indicated for each manhole and a centered
          entrance opening of 36 inches diameter (minimum).

     B.   The manhole, cover, and collar shall be capable of
          supporting truck loads on the cover and all other loads
          imposed by dry or wet earth.  Provide engineering
          computation "sealed" by a registered professional engineer
          as part of the shop drawing submittals for each size of
          manhole to substantiate that the manhole design
          accommodates the criteria set forth in C. below.

     C.   Design Loads:

          Dead Load:

          1.   Concrete at 150 PCF
          2.   Earth Cover at 120 PCF

          Lateral Earth Pressure on Walls:

          1.   Equivalent Fluid pressure above the water table at 32
               PSF per foot of depth.
          2.   Equivalent Fluid pressure below the water table at
               81.4 PSF per foot of depth.
          3.   Surcharge on walls equal two feet of dry earth.

               Time Load:     H20-AASHO truck loading rear wheel
                              load of 16,000 tons + 30% impact
                              (20,800 lbs. total)

     D.   Manholes shall be as manufactured by:  Penn Cast, Easi Set,
          A.C. Miller Products, Inc., or approved equivalent.

2.02 MANHOLE CAST IRON COVER AND RIM

     A.   The manhole cover shall be cast iron to accommodate a clear
          opening into the manhole of 36 inches diameter (minimum).

     B.   Covers for "Power" manholes shall have the word "Power"
          cast as part of the cover.

     C.   Covers for communications manholes shall have the letters
          "COMM" cast as part of the cover.

     D.   The rim supporting the cover shall be cast iron.

     E.   Cover and rim shall be structurally adequate to accommodate
          a 20 ton truck loading (H20-ASSH) as required for each
          manhole.

     F.   Covers shall be solid except for openings to enable placing
          and removing the cover, and shall be designed to meet
          standard U.S. Government designs for underground electric
          or telephone construction.

     G.   Covers and rims shall be as manufactured by:  NEENAH
          Foundry Company, or an approved equivalent.

2.03 GROUNDING ROD

     A.   Grounding rod shall be copper clad steel at least 15 feet
          long and 3/4 inches diameter (minimum).

     B.   Grounding rods shall be as manufactured by Copperweld or an
          approved equivalent.

2.04 VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL SUPPORT FRAME

     A.   Support frames shall be non-metallic, adjustable arm, cable
          racks as manufactured by Underground Devices, Inc.  and
          shall be provided on all sides of the manhole.

2.05 SPECIAL FITTINGS

     A.   Provide for each manhole a hot dip galvanized steel ladder
          that reaches from the rim supporting the cover to the floor
          of the manhole.  Attachments to secure the removable ladder
          to the steel rim shall be stainless steel.

     B.   Each manhole shall have "hot dip galvanized steel pulling
          eyes" for each wall.  Each "pulling eye" shall be located
          near the floor and shall be centered in the respective
          wall.

2.06 END BELLS

     A.   Provide end bells for all duct penetrations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TOP SURFACE

     The minimum depth of cover above the top surface of a manhole
     shall be 18 inches, and where grass or plants are to be grown in
     the covering material it shall be a high grade of topsoil.

3.02BOTTOM SURFACE

     Provide a hard gravel (3 inches or 4 inches size) filled drain
     field (one cubic yard minimum) under each manhole, and a sleeved
     opening (4 inches diameter minimum) through the center of the
     bottom of the manhole to reach the drain field.

3.03 GROUNDING ROD

     Provide a grounding rod in each manhole.  The rod shall protrude
     6 inches above the floor of the manhole and shall extend through
     the drain field into unexcavated earth below.  At least 8 feet
     of rod shall be in unexcavated earth.

3.04 REPAIRING DAMAGE

     The Contractor shall repair any damage to associated items
     resulting from settling of a manhole after its placement at no
     cost to the Owner.

3.05 ELEVATION

     The Contractor shall determine the required elevation of each
     manhole and shall submit this information as part of the Shop
     Drawing Data for manholes.

3.06 WATER PENETRATION

     Raceways penetrating manholes shall be sealed in place and
     manhole surfaces repaired to prevent the entrance of water into
     the manhole.

3.07 COLLAR

     Provide a collar between the top surface of the manhole and the
     cast iron cover rim such that the top of the cast iron cover
     shall be flush with the surrounding surface at final grade
     elevations.  The collar shall be constructed of brick and shall
     be at least 8 inches thick.

3.08 SUPPORT FRAMES

     Provide vertical and horizontal cable or wire support frames to
     run from the top to the bottom surface.  Horizontal support
     shall be 12 inches long.  Provide one horizontal support for
     each 2 feet of vertical support frame.  Frames shall be
     permanently secured to manhole and grounded by connection to the
     manhole ground rod via #2 bare copper wire.  Provide a vertical
     support at each 2 feet interval around the entire interior of
     the manhole.



SECTION 16413                            EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING (2.15.97)


PART I - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

     A.   The general provisions of the Contract including General
          and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply
          to work specified in this section.

          1.   The requirements of Section 16010 Electrical General
               Provisions shall apply to all work specified under
               this section.

1.02 SCOPE

     A.   The work includes all labor, materials, equipment, and
          services necessary for this work.

     B.   Where excavation disturbs existing roadways, gutters,
          curbs, walks, fences, trees, hedges, and grass, the
          disturbed items shall be replaced or repaired to equal the
          original condition.

     C.   The work under this section shall include, but is not
          limited to the following:  sheeting, sheet piling, bracing
          and shoring of all walls, structures, underground utilities
          or objects, horizontally, vertically or both; and includes
          the work performed by the Contractor and all subcontractors
          employed to perform all work specified in this division of
          specification.

     D.   The contract price is understood to include full
          compensation for all sheeting, sheet piling, bracing and
          shoring required for the safe conduct of work, whether or
          not it is specially  mentioned in these specifications or
          indicated on Contract Drawings.  No additional charge will
          be allowed for same except as provided in the provisions of
          the contract.

     E.   The responsibility of the performance of shoring methods
          and devices, including slopes, if any, shall lie entirely
          with the Contractor.  The correction of settlement and
          damage to persons and property due to settlement shall be
          the responsibility of the Contractor.

     F.   Shoring for all construction excavation shall be selected,
          designed, and supervised by a Registered Professional
          Engineer.  The cost of the Professional Engineering Service
          shall be paid by the Contractor.

     G.   Dewatering shall remove all water from excavation from the
          start of excavation.  All ground water, including water
          from such sources as springs, seepage, leakage, perched
          water, and all surface water from such sources as rain,
          snow, run off, streets, gutters, hydrants, accident
          spillage, and all liquid mud, from whatever source, shall
          be removed.  Water and its removal shall be considered
          unclassified excavation; fully the responsibility of the
          Contractor, without cost to the University.  Where
          necessary, the Contractor shall lower the water-table
          around the subgrade sufficiently to prevent a "quick"
          condition in the soil strata below a foundation.  If
          "quick" condition destroys the bearing capacity of the soil
          strata, the Contractor shall at no additional cost to the
          University lower excavations and backfill to design
          subgrades with select backfill as approved by the Engineer
          to obtain suitable soil bearing strata.  All water, mud,
          etc., removed from excavations shall be directed to any
          approved Sediment Control Device.

     H.   The responsibility for the performance of Dewatering
          methods and devices shall lie entirely with the Contractor. 
          The correction of settlement and damage to persons and
          property due to settlement shall be the responsibility of
          the Contractor.

     I.   The methods of Dewatering shall be as selected and designed
          by the Contractor and may include such methods as pumping,
          well points, damming, diverting, absorbing, and other
          methods selected to keep the excavations dry.

     J.   All excavation, with the exception of solid rock excavation
          or extra depth excavation as directed by the Engineer,
          shall be unclassified and include all material, either wet
          or dry, regardless of character.  Payment for Extra Depth
          Excavation and Rock Excavation shall be made in accordance
          with the contract provision.


PART 2  PRODUCTS

2.01 Props, shores, jacks, needles, braces, sheeting, cribbing, etc.,
     shall be materials, standards with and available to the
     Contractor, which are of proper size, and are in good
     serviceable condition.  Materials that are unsuitable for the
     intended purpose, or which are severely damaged shall not be
     used.

PART 3  EXECUTION

3.01 Trenches and pits shall be excavated to the depth and width
     required for proper installation of all underground items such
     as:  raceways, ductbanks, manholes or handholes.  Any necessary
     changes in line of grade shall be as approved by the University.

3.02 Guard railings or barricades shall be provided at or near the
     sides of trenches as necessary to protect the workmen and the
     public.  The description of the type of guardrail or barricades
     to be used shall be submitted to, and approved by, the
     University prior to starting any work.

3.03 Red lanterns, electrical blinkers, torches, or other approved
     lighting shall be placed along the exposed sides of all trenches
     at night as required for necessary warning to the public.  In no
     case shall the lights be placed further than 20 feet apart.

3.04 All excavations shall be kept free from water.

3.05 The bottoms of excavations shall be graded accurately to provide
     the required slope and the uniform bearing and supported for the
     entire length of each section.  Bottoms excavated too deeply or
     bottoms where soft, yielding, or unsuitable materials have been
     removed, as ordered by the University, shall  be filled to grade
     with bank run gravel compacted in eight (8) inch layers.  In
     trenching through rock, or buried walls and foundations,
     excavation shall extend to a minimum of 6 inches below the
     required grade, and the over-depth shall be filled with bank run
     gravel compacted in eight (8) inch layers.

3.06 Where the required grade for ductbank places in above existing
     grade, a bed, at the same slope as the pipe, shall be built up
     with bank run gravel compacted in eight (8) inch layers. 
     However, before the bed is placed, it must be determined that
     the material below is suitable.  Such material and the gravel
     bed shall have the University's approval before raceways are
     placed.

3.07 Existing utilities shall be protected from damage during the
     excavation and backfilling operations by bracing, sheeting, AND
     shoring as required.  Damaged utilities shall be repaired as
     required, at the Contractor's expense.

3.08 Excavations, if over four feet in depth, unless in solid rock
     hard shale or hardpan, shall be shored, sheeted, and braced. 
     All shoring and bracing shall be constructed in accordance with
     the minimum requirements for trench timbering and shall be
     effective to the bottom of the trench.

3.09 Where the cross section of the horizontal stringer or wale is
     not square, the greatest dimension shall be placed in a
     horizontal plane to gain the maximum.  Where a mechanical digger
     is used, the sheeting and grading shall be placed as close as
     possible to the lower end of the boom.

3.10 The bracing shall be held in place by hydraulic jacks, screw
     jacks, or by cross braces cleated and wedged in place.  Where
     the depth of the excavation is such that horizontal bracing is
     not feasible, diagonal cross bracing shall be installed such
     that the bottom of the bracing shall bear against a footing in
     the earth at the bottom of the excavation and adequate means
     shall be taken to prevent that bracing from kicking out.  In
     hand excavated trenches, cleats shall be securely fastened to
     join the ends of braces to stringers to prevent the braces from
     being knocked out of place.

3.11 All trenches four (4) feet or more in depth shall at all times
     be supplied with at least one (1) ladder for each one hundred
     (100) feet in length or fraction thereof.  The ladder shall
     extend from the bottom of the trench to at least three (3) feet
     above the surface of the ground and shall support a minimum
     weight of 300 pounds per step.

3.12 In all trench operations where men are at work or where they
     must pass to and from this work, sufficient lift, either natural
     or artificial, shall be provided at all times.  Pick and shovel
     men working in trenches shall be kept at sufficient distance
     apart to prevent injury to one another.

3.13 Excavated material and superimposed loads shall not be placed
     nearer than 18 inches to the sides of a trench or other
     excavation, unless bracing has been installed which is designed
     to withstand the load.

3.14 When trenches are undercut, they shall be shored to safely
     support the overhanging material.  The design of shoring shall
     be submitted to, and approved by, the University prior to
     installation.

3.15 If a trench is cut, or an embankment is created by excavating or
     grading alongside an existing building wall, structure, object
     alley, street, footway or underground utility, and the footing
     or elevation of the bottom of the structure, object, paving, or
     utility is nearer to the trench or embankment than the angle or
     repose for the soil, the sidewall of the trench of the
     embankment  shall be rigidly and adequately supported and
     braced.  If the method of and the materials to be used for
     support are not indicated on the Contract Drawings, same shall
     be submitted to and approved by the University, prior to the
     start of the excavation of grading work.

3.16 When the depth of the trench require two (2) lengths of sheet
     piling, one above the other, the lower length shall be set aside
     the bottom stringers or wales of the upper length and driven
     down and braced as the excavation continues.

3.17 Unless otherwise directed by the University, all tight sheeting
     shall be removed.  All scattered sheeting shall be removed.  All
     cross braces and horizontal stiffeners or stringers shall be
     removed as the trench is backfilled.  Any voids that may exist
     behind the sheeting shall be filled with earth during the
     backfilling operation.  The timber removed from the trench may
     be reused by the Contractor else where on the work if it is
     structurally sound.

3.18 No backfilling shall begin until all necessary tests and
     inspections have been made and until permission to proceed has
     been given by the University.

3.19 Only such materials, as have been approved by the University,
     shall be used for backfilling.

3.20 Backfilling shall be accomplished in compact six (6) inch layers
     until it has reached the center of the ductbank or manhole. 
     These items and fill shall then be inspected and approved by the
     University before more fill is placed.  Backfilling shall then
     be continued to one (1) foot above the top of the item in
     compacted six (6) inch layers.  The remainder of the backfilling
     to the top of the trench shall be placed in compacted eight (8)
     inch layers; however, trenches across roadways and other areas
     to be paved shall be filled entirely in compacted six (6) inch
     layers.

3.21 Compaction over one foot above the ductbank or manhole shall be
     done with approved mechanical tampers.  Compaction density shall
     be at least equal to that of the surrounding undisturbed earth
     or as otherwise specified.

3.22 Backfilling against cement shall not be done until the mortar is
     at least six days old.

3.23 Contractor shall remove and replace all existing paving, curb,
     sidewalks, and fences disturbed by excavation for this section
     of the specifications.

3.24 Backfilling against direct burial wire shall be sand or soft
     earth only - no rocks.

3.25 When existing grass is disturbed for work under this division,
     it shall be replaced by backfilling to final grade with at least
     18" of topsoil and the area shall be reseeded with grass to
     match the original.



SECTION 16450                                  SECONDARY GROUNDING (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

     A.   Power system grounding.

     B.   Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding.

     C.   Communication system grounding.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

     A.   Ground the electrical service system neutral at service
          entrance equipment to grounding electrodes and metallic
          water service as supplementary.

     B.   Ground each separately-derived system neutral to nearest
          grounding system.

     C.   Provide communications system grounding conductor at point
          of service entrance and connect to grounding system.

     D.   Bond together system neutrals: service equipment
          enclosures; exposed non-current carrying metal parts of
          electrical equipment; metal raceway systems; grounding
          conductor in raceways; receptacle ground connectors; and
          plumbing systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

     A.   Submit product data under the provisions of Section 16010
          indicating sizes of ground rods, connectors, and ground
          wire being used in the grounding system.

     B.   Indicate the location of system, grounding electrode
          connections, and routing of grounding electrode conductor.

     C.   Submit ground system manufacturer's recommended
          installation procedure for review under provisions of
          Section 16010, "GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS".

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

     A.   ANSI/IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.

     B.   ANSI/IEEE 32 - Requirements, terms, and test procedures for
          neutral grounding devices.

     C.   NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

     D.   Also refer to Section 16010, "GENERAL ELECTRICAL
          PROVISIONS", Paragraph 1.06 "CODES, REGULATIONS, AND
          PERMITS".

     E.   NFPA - 70 National Electrical Code

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

     A.   Submit an accurate record of exact locations of equipment
          grounding points and grounding electrodes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUND RODS

     A.   Copper-encased steel, 3/4 inch diameter, minimum length 10
          feet.

2.02 GROUNDING ACCESSORIES

     A.   Provide all grounding conductors.

     B.   Provide bare, stranded, tinned copper conductors no smaller
          than #4/0 AWG no less than 24 inches below grade,
          connecting to ground rods.  Equipment connections shall not
          be smaller than #4 AWG.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

     A.   Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe
          using a suitable ground clamp.  Make connections to flanged
          piping at street side of flange.  Provide a braided copper
          bonding jumper across all flanges.

     B.   Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor
          in each raceway for feeders and branch circuits.  Terminate
          each end on a grounding lug, bus or bushing.

     C.   Supplementary Grounding Electrodes:  Use driven ground rods
          to achieve the specified resistance.

     D.   Use minimum #6 AWG copper conductor for communications
          service grounding conductor.  Leave ten feet slack
          conductor at terminal board.

     E.   Bond conductors together using thermoweld process.

     F.   Isolated Grounding Systems:  Use insulated equipment
          grounding conductor and connect only to grounding grid
          electrode.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

     A.   Field inspection and testing shall be performed under
          provisions of Section 16010 in the presence of the
          Engineer.

     B.   Maximum acceptable ground resistance:  5 ohms.

     C.   Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and
          connections for tightness and proper installation.



SECTION 16480                                 480V UNIT SUBSTATION (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

     A.   480V Unit Substation Suitable for Indoor Installation.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

     Grounding Systems, Reference - Section 16390

1.03 SUBMITTALS

     A.   Submit shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's
          installation instructions under the provisions of Division
          1, on all components of the unit substation.  Submit shop
          drawings indicating outline dimensions, enclosure
          construction, shipping splits, lifting and supporting
          points, electrical single line diagram, and equipment
          electrical ratings.  Submit trip current and let-through
          current curves for all circuit breakers.

1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

     A.   Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of
          Division 1.  Include fuse replacement, adjustment,
          lubrication, and component replacement instructions.

1.05 REFERENCES

     A.   NEC

     B.   NEMA - AB1, PB2, TR1, ST20, 260

     C.   ANSI - C37.20, C37.47, C57.12.01, C57.12.91, 386, Z55.1,
          C57.94

     D.   IEEE - 48

     E.   UL - 198, 891

     F.   NESC

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

     A.   Use products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in
          the business of manufacturing, installing, and servicing of
          this class of electrical gear, the type required by this
          Section of these Specifications, and with a history of
          successful production of five years.

     B.   Unless otherwise indicated, the specifications are intended
          to include everything obviously requisite and necessary to
          the proper building and functioning of the equipment
          whether each necessary item is mentioned herein or not.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

     A.   Deliver product to site.

     B.   Accept the units on site and inspect for damages.  Store
          the products in secure and dry storage facility, and
          protect from moisture in accordance with manufacturers
          instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

     A.   The medium voltage air interrupter switches, transformer,
          and 480 volts main distribution switchboard shall be
          assembled into one continuous line up.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

     A.   General Electric Company

     B.   Westinghouse Electric Corporation

     C.   Square D

2.03 TRANSFORMER

     A.   Transformer shall be dry type, cast coil construction,
          built and tested in accordance with applicable standards
          and codes.

     B.   Transformer shall be 13.2 KV delta primary, 480-277 volts,
          3 phase, 4 wire, grounded wye secondary.  The primary taps
          shall be full capacity with two, 2½% above and two, 2½%
          below rated voltage.  Tap selection shall be accomplished
          in the de-energized condition only.  The impedance shall be
          5.75%.  The sound level shall not exceed the NEMA standard
          maximum db for the applicable KVA size of dry-type
          transformers in accordance with NEMA TR 1.

     C.   The average temperature rise of the transformer windings
          shall not exceed 80  C above a 40  C ambient temperature,
          when the transformer is operated at full nameplate rating. 
          All insulating materials used shall be in accordance with
          ANSI C57.12.01 standard, for a 220  C insulation system.

          The continuous self-cooled KVA rating of the transformer
          shall be determined by the designer in accordance with  
          project.  Provisions for future forced air cooling shall be
          provided, including special under-carriage with air plenum
          chamber, thermal sensors (thermistors), forced-air cooled
          capacity in all current carrying parts, and mounting
          provisions for fan and control box.  The forced air cooling
          shall increase the continuous self-cooled KVA rating by
          50%.  The bus shall be sized for forced air cooling rating.

     D.   Both HV and LV windings shall be copper conductors.  HV and
          LV windings shall each be separately cast as one rigid
          tubular coil, and arranged coaxially.  Each cast coil shall
          be fully reinforced with glass cloth, and cast under vacuum
          to assure complete, void-free resin impregnation throughout
          the entire insulation system.  Coils shall be supported by
          cast epoxy bottom supports and spacer blocks and spring
          loaded top blocks, and shall have no rigid mechanical
          connection between them.  The windings must not absorb
          moisture, and shall be suitable for other storage in 100%
          humidity at temperatures of from -40  C, and shall be
          capable of immediately being switched on after such storage
          without predrying.

     E.   The transformer core shall be constructed of high grade,
          grain oriented silicon steel laminations, with high
          magnetic permeability.  Magnetic flux density is to be kept
          well below the saturation point.  The cores shall be
          cruciform in shape, with mitered corners to keep core
          losses, excitation current, and noise level at a minimum. 
          The outside surfaces of the core shall be protected against
          corrosion by a resin coating not less than 1 mm thick.

     F.   The impulse rating (BIL) of the high voltage winding shall
          be 95kv, without the use of supplemental surge arrestors. 
          The impulse rating (BIL) of the low voltage winding shall
          be at least 25kv.

     G.   The enclosures shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet
          steel.  All ventilating openings shall be in accordance
          with NEMA and the National Electrical Code standards for
          ventilated enclosures.  Enclosures shall have jacking pads
          designed to be flush with the enclosure.  The base shall be
          constructed of structural steel members, to permit skidding
          or rolling in any direction.  Enclosure shall be compatible
          with adjacent units and painted with ANSI 61 light gray. 
          The enclosure shall be drip proof.

          Rubber vibration isolating pads shall be installed by the
          manufacturer between the core and coil and the enclosure. 
          The core shall then be visibly grounded to the enclosure
          ground bus by means of a flexible grounding conductor in
          accordance with NEMA standards and NEC.  Lifting lugs shall
          be provided to facilitate lifting of the complete
          transformer assembly.  The enclosure shall have removable
          panels for access, inspection, and maintenance.

2.04 MEDIUM VOLTAGE AIR INTERRUPTER SWITCHES (Indoor)

     A.   The medium voltage switchgear shall consist of two
          interrupter switches and a fused switch suitable for a
          looped primary system with one feeder, securely bolted
          together to form an integrated structure.

     B.   The switchgear shall be rated for 13.8kv nominal voltage,
          3 phase 15kv class and 95kv BIL.  Main bus ampacity shall
          be 600 amperes continuous.  The short circuit interrupting
          capacity shall be 750 MVA, 3 phase symmetrical, at 13.8kv. 
          The switchgear shall meet all applicable requirements of
          the ANSI, IEEE, NEMA, and NEC.

     C.   Each air interrupter switch shall be three pole gang
          operated, two position load break, manually operated,
          quick-make, quick-break with a stored energy spring
          mechanism to provide quick operation independent of the
          handle speed.  Each switch shall be rated for 600 amperes
          continuous, 600 amperes load interrupting, 4000 amperes RMS
          asymmetrical fault closing and 4000 amperes RMS
          asymmetrical momentary rating.  The air interrupter
          switches shall be of the non-external arc type with
          porcelain enclosed, silver tipped arcing contacts.  The
          incoming switch units (2 nos.) shall be equipped with three
          (3), 10kv distribution class lightning arrestors each. 
          Provide incoming cable terminations, switch, and fuse
          grounding studs and cable fault indicators (door mounted
          and visible from the outside).

     D.   The medium voltage fuses shall be accessible only through
          a separate door mechanically interlocked with the load
          break switch, to prevent opening of the door unless the
          switch is in the open position or closing the switch if the
          door is open.  Protective, hinged, full height screen
          barriers, retained with captive thumb screws shall be
          provided in front of the switches and fuses to prevent
          inadvertent contact with energized parts when the enclosure
          door is open.  All screen barriers shall be equipped with
          signs reading "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE".  Interphase and end
          barriers shall be provided.

     E.   The medium voltage main bus, bus taps, ground bus, and
          other conductive components shall be of copper.  The bus
          shall be constructed and braced as to withstand the short-
          circuit stresses associated with the interrupting rating of
          the switchgear.  Each bus bar connection in the switchgear
          shall be made up with two bolts not less than 3/8 inch
          diameter.  All bus taps and joints shall be silver plated. 
          All energized buses shall be supported on NEMA Class A-20,
          95 KV BIL porcelain insulators.  The ground bus shall
          extend through the full length of the switchgear with a
          section at least 12 inches in length extended to the front
          of each compartment.

          In a separate metal housing, provide three spare fuse
          holders with snufflers, six spare fuse refill units of each
          different size, and one, 1-1/2 inch by 4 inch epoxy
          fiberglass double ended fuse handling stick complete with
          large fuse clamp on one end and station prong on the other
          end.

     F.   Each switch compartment shall be metal enclosed, free
          standing, self-supporting, dead front, and joined together
          to form a continuous structure.  Concealed hinged doors and
          removable panels shall be provided as required for
          operation and maintenance.

          Switch operating handles shall be permanently mounted and
          located on the front of the enclosure and shall have
          provision for padlocking in the closed or open position. 
          Indicator plates shall show position.

          Enclosure shall be made from welded structural steel shapes
          and leveled steel sheets of thickness as specified in the
          appropriate standards.

          Switch compartment doors shall be of bulkhead type
          construction.  The door shall be provided with three or
          more latches of a design which places the latching member
          in shear or the equivalent so as to withstand both outward
          and lateral forces.  Inspection windows shall be provided
          in each door, so located that the open and closed positions
          of the load interrupter blades and the blown fuse indicator
          shall be readily discernible from the exterior of the
          enclosure.  Such windows shall be of laminated safety plate
          glass and gasket mounted.  Doors shall be interlocked to
          prevent opening when switch is in the closed position. 
          Furnish and install pad locks for all lockable doors and
          operating handles.  Locks shall be Best Company, with
          University standard cores and keys.

2.05 480 VOLTS MAIN DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD

     A.   Switchboard:  NEMA PB2.

          1.   Line and Load Terminations:  Shall be accessible from
               front only of switchboard, suitable for conductor
               materials used.

          2.   Main Section Devices:  The main circuit breaker shall
               be individually mounted with ammeter, voltmeter,
               ammeter selector switch with "OFF", voltmeter selector
               switch with phase-phase, phase-neutral, and "OFF"
               positions.  The line side of the main circuit breaker
               shall be connected directly to the transformer
               secondary, via rigid copper bus.  Provide metering
               transformer compartment transformers, meters, and
               instrumentation in accordance with Sections 15975 and
               15995 for CCMS.

          3.   Distribution Section Devices:  Shall be panel mounted.

          4.   Shall be suitable for service entrance application. 

     B.   Ratings:

          1.   480Y/277 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire and ground.

          2.   Main bus ampacity:  To be determined by designer.

          3.   Integrated Equipment Rating:  Based on the short
               circuit calculation by the designer.

     C.   Switching and Over-current Protective Devices:

          1.   Molded case circuit breakers, NEMA AB 1, and trip
               indicating.  Fused switch or switch and fuse and
               series rated circuit breakers are not acceptable.

          2.   Provide Ground fault over-current protection on the
               Main circuit breaker, and distribution section
               breakers.

          3.   Provide long-time and short-time trip units on the
               main circuit breaker.

     D.   Bussing:

          1.   Bus Material:  98% conductivity Copper ASTM B187,
               sized in accordance with NEMA PB 2.

          2.   Bus Connections:  Accessible from front for
               maintenance.

          3.   Provide copper ground bus on not less than 1/4 inch by
               2 inch to extend the entire length of switchboard.

          4.   Capable of withstanding mechanical stresses and heat
               due to maximum available short circuit current, at the
               equipment location. 

          5.   Bus contact Surfaces:  Silver plated at connections
               and joints.  Splicing connections in the buses and tap
               connections to the buses shall be drilled and machined
               before the contact surfaces are silverplated.

          6.   Neutral Bus Rating:  Same as that of phase bus.

          7.   Control Bus:  120 Volts A.C., Copper, 6 AWG minimum,
               with UL Class J or RK-5 fuses.

     E.   Ground-Fault Protection System:

          1.   Ground Relay:

               (a)  Solid-state, adjustable.

               (b)  Current adjustment range:  100 to 600 amperes
                    with three calibration marks minimum.

               (c)  Time adjustment band:  Instantaneous and 6 cycle
                    calibration mark.

               (d)  Setting:  As necessary to maximize protection.

          2.   Current Sensors:  Window type, encircling all phases
               and neutral conductors or each phase and neutral to
               respond to net alternating ground current flow.

          3.   The Main Circuit Breaker Test and Indicating Panel:

               (a)  Mounted in front of the Switchboard adjacent to
                    the Breaker.
               (b)  Test Switch.

               (c)  Trip Indicator.

               (d)  Reset Button.

          4.   120 Volts, A.C., 60 Hz. control power for ground fault
               protection scheme shall be supplied from a 120 Volt
               A.C. emergency power panel.

     F.   Future Provisions:

          1.   Spaces for future devices shall be fully equipped with
               continuous current rated bussing and provisions for
               bus connection.

          2.   Provide 15% spare breakers and 15% equipped space. 
               All spares shall be rated for 600A frame, 400A trip.

     G.   Low Voltage Wiring:

          All low voltage control wiring shall be stranded copper
          flameproof switchboard type, No. 14 AWG minimum.  Extra
          flexible stranding shall be used for connections passing
          around hinges or swinging doors or panels.  Where subject
          to abrasion, cables shall be provided with protective
          sheathing.

     H.   Enclosure:

          1.   Dead-front, free-standing indoor steel enclosure. 
               NEMA Type-I General Purpose.

          2.   Steel structure with framework of welded structural
               steel, free from distortion and welding strain and
               sufficiently rigid to support equipment under normal
               and short circuit conditions.

          3.   Each Breaker compartment equipped with hinged door or
               bolted cover in front and bolted rear cover.  Bolted
               covers furnished with headed studs and key hole slots
               for hanging in position before bolting.

          4.   The circuit breakers shall be externally operable. 
               The highest breaker handle shall not be more than six
               feet six inches above finished floor.

          5.   Spaces for future breakers to include necessary bus
               connections and device supports.  Do not taper main
               bus rating.

          6.   Height:  90 inches, excluding floor sills, lifting
               members, and pull boxes.

          7.   Finish:  Manufacturer's standard ANSI light gray baked
               enamel over external surfaces.

          8.   Pull Box:  Extend switchboard enclosure to provide
               wire pulling and bending space.

          9.   The entire switchboard structure shall be mounted on
               a steel base to insure proper adjustment of all units
               and be suitable for mounting on level floor.

          10.  The main distribution switchboard shall be an integral
               part of the unit substation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

     A.   Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

     B.   Verify field measurements are as instructed by the
          manufacturer.

     C.   Verify that required utilities are available, in proper
          location, and ready for use.

     D.   Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing
          surface conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

     A.   Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
          approved shop drawings.

     B.   Install safety labels in accordance with NEMA 260.

     C.   Make power cable and control wire connections as follows:

          Make power cable and control wire connections to molded-case 
          circuit breakers by means of integral mechanical
          connectors.  If such items are not furnished with integral
          mechanical connectors, make connections using compression
          connectors.

     D.   Make grounding connections in accordance with NEC.

     E.   The connection between medium voltage switchgear and the
          transformer, and between the transformer and main
          switchboard shall be via rigid copper bus.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

     A.   Field Testing and Inspection

          1.   General Requirements

               (a)  Conduct field testing and inspection to ensure
                    proper operation of equipment provided.

               (b)  Relays and Trip Device Setting:  The contractor
                    is responsible for setting protective relays and
                    trip devices in accordance with approved
                    coordination study and their calibration for
                    proper operating during field testing.

               (c)  Field inspection and testing shall be performed
                    under provisions of Section 16010.

          2.   Field Inspection

               (a)  Prior to field testing, check equipment
                    installation in accordance with manufacturer's
                    recommendations and IEEE 141 including, but not
                    limited to, verification of the following:

               (b)  Integrity of all bus insulation.

               (c)  Tightness (Torque) of all connections.

               (d)  Adequate support of all bus bars.

               (e)  Correct grounding, anchoring, and alignment of
                    the switchgear in accordance with manufacturer's
                    drawings.

               (f)  Ease of racking drawout breakers in and out of
                    all cubicles.

               (g)  Physical interchangeability of all similar
                    circuit breakers.

               (h)  Adjustment of each circuit breaker contact or
                    interrupter switch.

               (i)  Functioning of all interlocks and the closing of
                    all safety shutters with the breakers in
                    disconnect or withdrawn positions.

               (j)  Tightness (torque) of all bolted bus joints by
                    calibrated-torque-wrench method, based on
                    manufacturer's recommended values.

               (k)  Ground-Fault System:  Inspect for physical damage
                    in compliance with approved shop drawings. 
                    Verify location relative to sensors of main
                    neutral-to-ground bus disconnect link and
                    avoidance of multiple ground connections in
                    electrical room.

               (l)  Inspect zero sequence systems for symmetrical
                    alignment of all core balance transformers about
                    current-carrying conductors.

               (m)  Verify by device operation all ground-fault by
                    device circuit nameplate identification.

               (n)  Calibrate all protective devices/relays and set
                    each of them in accordance with an approved
                    coordination study.

          3.   Field Testing

               (a)  Furnish all equipment required to perform all
                    tests.

               (b)  Provide the services of a manufacturer's
                    engineering representative to support the
                    electrical testing company.  Conduct all tests in
                    the presence of the Engineer.  For each item,
                    submit for approval and perform approved tests
                    including, but not limited to, those specified.

               (c)  For Air Interrupter Switch Section:

                    (1)  Perform mechanical operator tests in
                         accordance with manufacturer's
                         instructions.  Check blade alignment and
                         arc interrupter operations.

                    (2)  Perform insulation resistance test on each
                         phase to ground and from each phase to each
                         other phase.  Record results.

                    (3)  Perform AC or DC over potential test to
                         ANSI/IEEE 37.20.

                    (4)  Perform contact resistance test across each
                         switch blade.  Report any contact
                         resistance in excess of 50 micro ohms.

                    (5)  Operate and verify all steps of the key
                         interlock operation.

               (d)  For Transformer Section:

                    (1)  Test transformer in accordance with
                         ANSI/IEEE C57.12.91.

                    (2)  Contractor shall connect and get test new
                         transformer before energizing.  The data
                         shall be incorporated into the medium
                         voltage test report.

                    (3)  Perform a transformer winding insulation
                         resistance between winding-to-winding and
                         winding-to-ground.  Correct the resistance
                         value to the temperature.

                    (4)  Transformer widing turns ratio for full
                         winding and taps.  Test results shall not
                         deviate more than 0.5% form calculated
                         results.

                    (5)  Measure the ground resistance of the
                         transformer ground and bonding system.  The
                         resistance shall not exceed 5 ohms.

                    (6)  Test the transformer terminals, including
                         the neutral terminal, for continuity to the
                         ground bus.

                    (7)  Check all phase relationships.

                    (8)  Testing of the new transformers after
                         energizing shall include, but not be
                         limited to, the following (incorporate all
                         data into the medium voltage test report):

                         (a)  AC power factor.

                         (b)  No-load voltage.

               (e)  For 480 Volts Main Distribution Switchboard
                    Section:

                    (1)  Perform insulation resistance test of 60-second 
                         duration in accordance with the
                         following requirements.

                         (a)  Test Voltage

                         (b)  Voltage Rating:  150-600 volts 1000
                              volts.

                         (c)  Insulation Resistance:  Shall be the
                              kv rating plus one megohm but shall
                              not be less than the minimum value
                              recommended by the manufacturer.

                         (d)  Do not perform dielectric withstand
                              test unless the insulation resistance
                              is equal to or greater than the
                              minimum value specified.

                    (2)  Perform insulation resistance tests between
                         each phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.

                    (3)  Test grounding conductors and enclosures
                         for continuity to the electrical room
                         grounding system.

                    (4)  Test protective relays and trip devices
                         except power fuses in accordance with IEEE
                         141 procedures, modified as necessary, for
                         compliance with approved coordination
                         study.

                    (5)  Test the operation of each circuit and in
                         accordance with an approved sequence.

                    (6)  Test Interlock System As Follows:

                         (a)  Make closure attempt on each device
                              when locked open.

                         (b)  Make opening attempt on each device
                              when locked closed.

                    (7)  Test all current transformer circuits for
                         polarity, ratio, and protective device
                         operation by secondary injection method.

                    (8)  Perform functional test on all control,
                         interlocking, blocking, and supervisory
                         circuits.  Include verification of all
                         interconnections between equipment and each
                         interface point.

                    (9)  Ground Fault System:

                         (a)  Insulation Resistance:  Remove neutral
                              ground disconnect link and measure
                              system neutral insulation resistance
                              to ensure that no shunt ground paths
                              exist.  System neutral insullation
                              shall be 10,000 ohms minimum,
                              preferably one megohm or greater.   
                              Reinstall link.

                         (b)  Determine each relay pickup current by
                              primary injection at sensor and
                              operation of each circuit interrupting
                              device.  Pickup current shall be
                              within 10% of the device setting.

                         (c)  Test each relay timing by injection
                              150% and 300% of pickup current into
                              the sensor.  Relay timing shall be
                              within the manufacturer's published
                              time-current characteristic curves.

3.04 ADJUSTING

     Adjust primary taps of the transformer so that the secondary
     voltage is within one percent (1%) of the rated voltage.



SECTION 16500                                             LIGHTING (2.15.97)


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

     A.   Interior luminaries and accessories.

     B.   Lamps.

     C.   Ballasts.

     D.   Exit Signs.

     E.   Exterior Luminaries and accessories.

     F.   Poles and brackets.

     G.   Splices and taps.

1.02 SUBMITTAL

     A.   Submit product data for each luminaire and lighting unit. 
          Include outline drawings, photometric data, lamp and
          ballast data, support points, weights, and accessory
          information for each luminaire type.

     B.   Submit manufacturer's installation instructions,
          instructions for storage, handling, protection,
          examination, and preparation.

     C.   Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
          stipulated by product testing agency specified under
          regulatory requirements.

     D.   Submit lighting calculation for site lighting; parking
          lighting; exterior security lighting; and administration
          interior lighting.

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

     A.   Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

     B.   Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.

     C.   Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Inc..

1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

     A.   Provide & design the building lighting system layout
          (Interior and Exterior) in conformance with IES recommended
          procedures and foot candle requirements and UMCP Standard
          illumination requirements.

     B.   Parking Garage.

          1.   Each floor of the parking garage shall consist of two
               separate areas of lighting:

               (a)  The parking area lighting along the inside
                    perimeter walls shallbe controlled by a photo-cell 
                    activating a contactor for daily ON-OFF
                    operation with a time clock with manual override
                    feature of being turned ON or OFF.

               (b)  The inner parking area lights shall burn 24 hours
                    per day with the on-off control of the panel
                    lighting contactor.

               (c)  The fixtures in a & b above shall incorporate
                    adequate amount of fixtures to be connected to
                    the emergency panel system to provide an average
                    maintained illumination of 1.5 footcandle for
                    security whenever the main body of fixtures are
                    turned off.  These fixtures are to include the
                    "Hot Lamp Restart" modification.

          2.   The stairwell, elevator, and exit lights will be
               connected to the emergency system and burn 24 hours
               per day.  Include "Hot Lamp Restart" for all stairwell
               lights.

          3.   Parking roof top lighting shall be controlled as
               described in .04.B.1 above.

          4.   Vehicle entrances fixtures to the garage shall be
               controlled as described in 1 above.

               LOCATION                      AVG. MAINTAINED
                                             FOOT CANDLES

               Stair Wells                        20
               Elevators                          15
               Traffic Lanes                      10
               Top Deck (Open)                    1.5
               Stairwell Entrances                20
               Exterior Building Security         1.5
               Emergency                          1.5
               Garage Entrance Areas              50
               Parking Garage Parking Area        5.0

     C.   Provide and design the roadway lighting, using University
          of Maryland College Park standard Gardco fixtures.  Submit
          point-to-point calculations.

1.05 MAINTENANCE

     A.   Provide two extra sets of each size and type of lens and
          enclosure.

     B.   Provide two extra sets of each lamp installed.

     C.   Provide two extra sets each size and type of ballast.

1.06 REFERENCES

     A.   ANSI C82.1     Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp
                         Ballast.

     B.   FS W-F-414     Fixture, lighting (Fluorescent, Alternating
                         current, Pendent Mounting).

     C.   ANSI/NFPA 70   National Electrical Code.

     D.   ANSI/NFPA 101  Life Safety Code.

     E.   ANSI C78.379   Electric Lamps - Incandescent and HID
                         reflector lamps - Classification of beam
                         pattern.

     F.   ANSI C82.4     Ballast for HID and LPS lamps.

     G.   NEMA WD 6      Wiring devices - dimensional requirements.

     H.   ANSI/IES RP-20 Lighting for parking facilities.

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS

     A.   Manufacturer:  Company specializing in manufacturing
          products specified in this section with minimum five years
          experience.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

     A.   Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under
          provisions of Division 1 and Section 16010. 

     B.   Accept products on site.  Inspect for damage.

     C.   Protect poles from finish damage by handling carefully.

1.09 COORDINATION

     A.   Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to the
          installer of the pole foundations.

1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

     A.   Accurately record actual locations of each luminaire with
          the switching arrangements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DEMOLITION

     A.   Remove all existing lighting poles, fixtures, base, and
          wiring which are located in or near the footprint of the
          garage.

     B.   Safely store poles and fixtures and reuse them wherever
          possible.  Unused poles and fixtures shall be turned over
          to UMCP Elecctric Shop.

     C.   Relocated poles with new lighting fixtures shall be
          connected to the new lighting panel and control system
          located in the new building.

2.02 INTERIOR LUMINARIES AND ACCESSORIES

     All lighting fixtures shall be completely pre-wired at the
     factory.

     A.   Acrylic Lens Fluorescent Fixtures:

          1.   Housing shall be constructed of minimum 20 gauge 
               die-formed steel.

          2.   Finishes shall be baked white enamel and shall have
               minimum reflectance value of 87 percent.  Fixtures
               constructed of pre-painted steel will not be
               acceptable.

          3.   Lenses shall be 3/16 inch injection molded virgin
               acrylic with hexagonal base precision prisms joined at
               adjacent sides to form a contiguous pattern.  The lens
               shall be supported by metered aluminum door frames
               with durable white finish and concealed hinges. 
               Latches shall be positive action type and mounted
               flush to the door frame.

          4.   Light loss factor of 60% and coefficient of
               utilization of 0.65 at room cavity ratio of 2 with
               ceiling-wall-floor reflectance of 70-50-20 percent
               shall be used for calculation and selection of
               fixtures.

          5.   Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures shall be furnished
               with a mounting frame or ring compatible with the
               ceiling in which they are to be installed.  The frames
               and rings shall be one piece and of sufficient size
               and strength to sustain the weight of the fixture. 
               Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the compatibility
               of the fixture to the ceiling.

     B.   Parabolic Fluorescent Fixtures

          1.   Shall be 3 inch deep parabolic louvers, with automated
               assembly, metered corners, and interlocking
               construction to assure precise parabolic shape.

          2.   Shall have a pre-anodized aluminum louver with semi
               Specular Silver finish.

          3.   Shall have thermally protected, resetting class P,
               high power factor ballast, sound rating A, CBM
               approved and UL listed.

          4.   Shall have wireway reflectors fit tight against the
               louver with no light leak into adjacent lamp cavity.

          5.   All steel parts shall be, painted after fabrication. 
               Shall have five stage iron-phosphate pre-treatment to
               ensure superior paint adhesion and rust resistance.

          6.   All painted parts shall be finished with polyester
               enamel (85% gloss and 89% reflectance).

          7.   2 feet by 4 feet parabolic fixture shall not have less
               than 18 cells, and 2 feet by 2 feet parabolic fixture
               shall match the cell size.

     C.   Wall Wash Fixtures

          In specified areas like main lobby and main corridor
          recessed fixed scoop wall wash shall be provided.

     D.   Garage Interior Fixtures

          1.   Lighting fixtures shall be energy saving, metal
               Halide, high intensity discharge type, low wattage,
               cast unit with lexan lens suitable for cold weather
               starting and vandal proof.

          2.   Housing:  Sides shall be of mitered, anodized .090
               inch aluminum extrusion. Top pan shall be of .080 inch
               aluminum die formed to interlock with sides.  Top pan
               shall be welded to housing sides and provide a
               continuous weatherproof seal.

          3.   Door/Lens Assembly:  The anodized extruded aluminum
               door segments shall retain the optically clear, heat
               and impact resistant tempered convex poloycarbonate
               lens in a sealed manner against the housing using
               hollow section, high compliance, memory retentive
               extruded silicone gasketing.  The door assembly shall
               hinge to the housing with concealed stainless steel
               hinge pins.

          4.   Reflector Assembly:  The segmented optical system
               shall be of homogeneous sheet aluminum, electro-
               chemically brightened, anodized and sealed.  The
               segmented reflectors shall be set in faceted arc image
               duplicator patterns to achieve Type vs (Vertical)
               distributions.  Medium base lampholders shall be
               attached to reflector assemblies.

          5.   Unitized Ballast Assembly:  Ballast and related
               components shall be integrated into a single mounting
               plate as a self contained sub-assembly.  Chassis shall
               be fabricated from 16 gauge sheet steel and shall be
               attached to reinforcing chassis by integral hinging
               bracket and hand operable fasteners.  Ballast assembly
               shall receive line current by means of plug assembly
               consisting of AMP Inc., plug No. 1-480-704-0 and male
               contacts No. 350547-1.  Receptacle shall be provided
               to supply lamp current to reflector assembly. 
               Receptacle shall consist of AMP Inc., Cat. No. 1-480701-0 
               and female contacts No. 350550-1.  Receptacle
               shall be mounted, be equipped with concealed, spring
               loaded, stainless steel latches, and hinge pins.

          6.   Electrical Characteristics:  Ballast type, lamp
               wattage, and rated input voltage shall be of the
               separate component type capable of providing reliable
               lamp starting down to -20  F; shall have power factor
               better than .90; and shall be the following:

               Metal Halide Lamp Ballast:  The auto transformer shall
               provide lamp power regulation to ±5% (MV) and ±10%
               (MH) with a ±10% variation of rated input voltage. 

               Component to component wiring within the luminaire
               shall carry no more than 80% of rated current and
               shall be listed by UL for use at 600 VAC at 150 C or
               higher.

          7.   Exterior Finish:  Each housing shall have neutral or
               bronze anodized finish.

          8.   Labels:  All fixtures shall bear UL Damp Location and
               I.B.E.W. labels.

          9.   Mounting:  Each Gardco SCA L style luminaire is
               designed to mount to concrete ceiling with a die
               formed anodized aluminum trunnion bracket assembly. 
               Trunnion assembly shall permit (6) one inch
               incremental mounting height adjustments.  A ½" I.P.S.
               weatherproof diecast aluminum hub with integral O-ring
               shall be located on the top pan for field attachment
               of rigid or flexible conduit (by others).  48 inches
               of Type SF-2 fixture wire shall be supplied for field
               connections.

          10.  Trunnion Bracket Assembly:  Upper and lower trunnions
               shall be of 3/16 inch by 1½" inches die formed
               anodized aluminum and shall bolt together with ¼-20
               carriage bolts and provide vertical height
               adjustments.  Upper trunnion shall have a central
               17/32 inches diameter hole providing pivotal alignment
               and two 13/32 inches diameter out-board mounting holes
               insuring rigid ceiling attachment.

     E.   Accessories:

          1.   Thermal protection devices to meet NFPA 70
               requirements shall be provided.

          2.   Spacers and brackets required for mounting surface
               luminaries shall be provided.

          3.   Any necessary extra channels, support wires or rods
               and associated items to provide a structurally sound
               system to support the fixture independently of the
               ceiling system shall be provided.

2.03 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL LUMINARIES AND ACCESSORIES

     A.   Enclosures:  Complete with gaskets to form weatherproof
          assembly.

     B.   Provide low temperature ballasts with reliable starting to
          zero degrees fahrenheit.

     C.   Provide Luminaire with integral photocell type automatic
          switching if no lighting control system is used.  Luminaire
          shall be vandal-proof.

     D.   Provide all mounting accessories required for complete
          installation.

     E.   Fixture shall be constructed of a one-piece aluminum
          hexagonal tapered holding with clear polycarbonate lenses
          and a spun and cast aluminum decorative hood. Hood shall
          have a decorative spun copper cupola.  Fixture shall be
          mechanically attached to cast aluminum decorative pole
          adaptor.

     F.   Optical assembly shall consist of a TYPE V segmented cut-off 
          reflector system.  Reflectors shall be made of a
          homogeneous sheet aluminum, electrochemically brightened,
          anodized, and sealed.

     G.   Ballast shall be 175-watt metal halide CWA-type with a -30 F 
          lamp starting capacity.  Ballast shall be remotely
          mounted on UBM-style ballast tray in the pole base.

     H.   Finish shall be oven-cured liquid polyurethane.  Color chip
          to be supplied by the Architect.

     I.   Fixture catalog number shall be LUMEC 
          UBM-175-L60-SGQ-VOLTAGE-SC, or equal.

     J.   Wall-mounted version catalog number shall be LUMEC 
          UBM-175-L60-SGQ-VOLTAGE-CRE-WM-0SC, or equal.

2.04 EXTERIOR ROADWAY LUMINAIRE AND ACCESSORIES

     A.   General Description:  The luminaires shall consist of a
          family of two units all similar in appearance differing
          only in physical size, lumen output, and mounting height. 
          Walkways shall utilize 175 watt units on fifteen foot
          poles; smaller parking areas and roadways, 400 watt units
          on 25 foot poles.  Luminaires shall be a rectangular sharp
          cutoff type for high intensity discharge lamps, totally
          enclosed with extruded anodized aluminum arms; shall be
          rain-tight, dust tight, corrosion resistant.  The hinged
          reflector and lens frame assemblies shall be safely
          retained in the closed and opened positions and shall be
          readily removable without the use of tools.

     B.   Housing:  Sides shall be a one piece multi-formed aluminum
          assembly with an integral reinforcing spine and single
          concealed joint; or shall be fabricated from a one-piece
          extruded aluminum side panel with mitered corners that are
          internally welded and sealed for weathertight integrity. 
          Tops shall be press-formed with a returned perimeter flange
          that shall interlock with the housing sides to provide a
          continuous weatherproof seal.

          Luminaires shall attach to arms by means of a mechanical
          draw-bolt attachment within the arm, eliminating all
          exposed fasteners or welds.  Rods shall thread into a 1/4
          inch thick steel bolster plate located within luminaire
          housing.  A steel reinforcing chassis made of 16 gauge
          steel shall be provided inside housing which will accept a
          removable, unitized ballast assembly.  A receptacle shall
          be provided to supply line current to the unitized ballast
          assembly.  Receptacle shall consist of AMP Inc. Cap. No. 
          1-480705-0 and female contacts No. 350550-1.  Receptacle
          shall be mounted to reinforcing chassis by means of a
          formed 16 gauge steel bracket.  All steel components shall
          be located within sealed portions of luminaire and shall be
          suitable electro-chemically treated or galvanized to
          provide corrosion protection. 

     C.   Luminaire Arm:  The luminaire arm shall be a one piece
          rectangular extrusion with internal centering guides. 
          Luminaire-to-pole assembly shall be made through a
          mechanical drawbolt or welds.  Arm assembly shall include
          a cast iron hot dipped galvanized pole reinforcing plate
          which will mount inside the visible on the sides of the
          pole.  A gasket of a non-absorptive, weatherproof material
          shall be provided between the luminaire arm and the pole.

     D.   Unitized Ballast Assembly:  Ballasts and related components
          shall be integrated into a single mounting plate as a self-
          contained subassembly.  Chassis shall be fabricated from 16
          gauge sheet steel and shall be attached to reinforcing
          chassis by integral hinging bracket and hand operable
          fasteners.  Ballast assemble shall receive line current by 
          means of plug assembly consisting of AMP Inc. plug No. 
          1-480704-0 and male contacts No. 350547-1.  Receptacle shall
          be provided to supply lamp current to reflector assembly. 
          Receptacle shall consist of AMP Inc. cap No. 1-480704-1 and
          female contacts No. 350550-1.  Receptacle shall be mounted
          be equipped with concealed, spring loaded, stainless steel
          latches and hinge pins.  The lens frame construction shall
          allow field replacement of glass without special tools,
          shall be securely retained in the housing in either closed
          or open positions, and shall be removable without the use
          of tools.  The lens frame to housing seal shall be of the
          same material as the glass seal.

     E.   Reflector Assembly:  The optical system shall be of
          homogenous sheet aluminum, electro chemically brightened,
          anodized and sealed, or a highly specular alzak.  The
          reflector(s) and lamp socket assembly shall be arranged to
          achieve ANSI type III distribution specified lamps operated
          within their recommended mounting limits.  Reflector
          assemblies shall be equipped with plug disconnect
          assemblies consisting of AMP Inc. plug No. 1-480700-0 and
          male contacts No. 350557-1.  Tow wires shall be current
          carrying conductors and one wire shall be a grounding
          conductor.  Wires from plug shall splice to lampholder
          leads using nylon crimp connectors Hollingsworth No.
          NP5115.  Each connector shall be wrapped with minimum two
          layers of 3M No. 27 glass tape to thermally protect
          connectors from reflector.  Conductors shall be provided
          with physical strain relief by fastening the leads emerging
          from connector to reflector body by means of a No. MS21919-H5 
          clamp. Lamp holder shall be porcelain mogul base with
          vibration proof lamp grip shill, socket keyed to specified
          lamps (175 watt and 400 watt size only).  A lamp stabilizer
          capable of supporting the lamp in the correct light center
          position shall be part of the assembly.

     F.   Internal Wiring:  Component wiring within luminaire shall
          be UL Listed type SF-2 wire sized in accordance with UL-57.

     G.   Exterior Finish:  All luminaire arms shall receive integral
          color, aluminum Association Architectural Class I anodizing
          (Duranodic or Kalcolor) dark bronze after fabrication.

     H.   Labels:  All fixtures shall bear UL Wet Location and
          I.B.E.W. labels.  

     I.   Manufacturer and Catalog Numbers:  Luminaries shall be as
          manufactured by Gardco Manufacturing, Inc.

     J.   Luminaries shall be as follows:

          Roadway and Parking Area Luminaire with 400 watt lamp
          Gardco No. UBM-1913-277-400 MH-BRA.

2.05 LAMPS

     A.   Fluorescent Lamps:  F32T8 4100 K, energy saving, rapid
          start type, as manufactured by General Electric Sylvania or
          Philips of North-America.  All lamps by a single
          manufacturer.

     B.   General Use Incandescent Lamps:  Inside frosted type rated
          130 volts.

     C.   Metal Halide Lamp for Outdoor Fixtures:  Designed for
          horizontal burning, manufactured by Sylvania or approved
          equal.  Contractor must submit a sample of lamps other than
          specified for approval by the owner before formal approval
          by the engineer.

          175 Watt: MS175/HOR
          400 Watt: MS400/HOR

     D.   Metal halide lamp for indoor fixtures shall be designed for
          vertical burning, manufactured by Sylvania or approved
          equal.

2.06 BALLASTS

     A.   Fluorescent Ballasts:  ANSI C82.1; high power factor,
          electronic ballast, rapid start, energy saving type,
          suitable for lamps specified, all ballasts by a single
          manufacturer.  All ballasts shall be sound rated "A".  The
          fluorescent ballast shall be rated for 277 or 120 volt
          operation.  Ballasts shall be ETL and CBM approved. 
          Ballasts shall be designed with built-in automatic
          resetting thermal cutout protective device, and shall be
          designed for continuous operation to limit ballast
          temperature to 90 degrees C.  Ballasts shall be class P PCB
          free, UL listed.  Input current Total Harmonic Distortion
          (THD) shall not exceed 20 percent, and the minimum power
          factor shall be 0.90.  Average ballast life shall be rated
          at 60,000 hours or more based on 3 hour average burn
          cycles.

     B.   High Intensity Discharge (HID) ballasts:  ANSI C82.4,
          medium regulation auto transformer units and shall provide
          +10 6/0 lamp per regulation or better with a HO % variation
          from rated input voltage.  The ballast shall be capable of
          providing reliable lamp starting down to -20 F and shall
          have a power factor of 0.90 or better.  Ballast shall be
          suitable for lamp selected and shall be rated for 277 volt
          operation.

     C.   Compact fluorescent ballast shall be core and coil, UL
          listed, Class P thermally protected and sound class "A"
          rating.  Average ballast life shall be rated for 24,000
          hours or more.  Ballasts shall have high power factor.

     D.   Warranty:  Minimum two years of warranty after the date of
          acceptance for all types of ballasts.

2.07 EXIT SIGNS

     A.   Exit signs shall be provided in accordance with Section 
          5-10 of NFPA 101.

     B.   Exit Sign Fixtures:  Sheet steel housing, metal stencil
          face with red letters directional arrows shall be universal
          type for field adjustment and universal mounting for field
          selection.

     C.   Exit signs shall be powered by the building emergency power
          system through connection at emergency panels.  Exit lights
          handing integral battery power shall not be permitted.

     D.   The lamps for exit sign fixture shall be manufacturer's
          standard LED type.  The input voltage shall be 277 or 120
          volts.

2.08 POLES

     A.   All lighting poles shall be square tapered fabricated steel
          type with anchor base, handhole, and hardware necessary for
          a complete assembly to support the luminaire furnished.

     B.   Mounting Heights:  Nominal pole heights shall be as
          follows:

          Walkway Lighting Units:       15'-0"

          Roadway Areas:                25'-0"

     C.   Design:  All poles shall be designed structurally to
          incorporate wind load criteria of the American Standards
          Institute building code A58.1-1972.  All criteria of this
          code including wind pressure adjustments for mounting
          heights and dynamic responses of the pole and luminaire
          combination to random wind gusts.  Drag coefficient for the
          pole shaft shall be included in the calculations.  All
          calculations shall be made assuming two luminaries per
          pole.  All pole and luminaire combinations shall be
          designed to withstand a constant wind speed of 100 miles
          per hour with maximum gusts to 130 miles per hour. 
          Deflection of the pole shaft in these conditions shall not
          exceed 5 percent of the pole's nominal mounting height for
          all pole sizes.  Contractor's submittals on all poles shall
          include complete structural calculations.

     D.   Pole Shafts:  Pole shafts shall be fabricated from minimum
          11 gauge square tapered steel pole, minimum 11 gauge steel,
          or approved equal.  All welding required for the
          fabrication of the shaft and other parts of the pole
          assembly shall be done with welding wire compatible with
          the alloy specified.  The anchor base to which the shaft
          shall be welded shall be fabricated from a steel plate of
          the same alloy and shall be continuously welded inside and
          out.

     E.   Anchor Bolts:  All anchor bolts shall be fabricated of hot
          rolled special quality carbon steel with minimum 50,000 psi
          yield strength.  Bolts shall be furnished with nuts and
          washers.  All bolts and hardware shall be zinc electro-plated 
          after fabrication.

     F.   Handhole:  Each pole shall be furnished with a reinforced
          handhole with a grounding lug centered approximately 12
          inches above the base.  Handholes shall have a minimum
          clear access opening of 2-1/2 inches by 5 inches.

     G.   Base Cover:  Each pole shall be provided with a two piece
          base cover fabricated from the above specified alloy.  The
          cover shall be attached to the pole by means of tamperproof
          hardware.

     H.   Hardware:  All fastening hardware for handholes, base
          covers etc. shall be stainless steel.

     I.   Finish:  After fabrication, the pole assembly, handhole
          cover, base cover etc. shall be grit blasted down to bare
          metal, removing all scale, dirt etc., in order to provide
          a uniform weathering of the pole assembly.  Poles must be
          weatherproofed prior to delivery to the job site.

     J.   Poles shall be as manufactured by Valmont and shall match
          with other University Standard Poles.

2.09 SPLICES, TAPS

     A.   All splices underground in handholes or other wet locations
          shall be waterproof and made with Scotchcast 85 Multi-Mold
          Splicing Kits, or approved equal.

     B.   All Taps in pole bases shall use suitable connectors such
          as Burndy Type Ks and taped with two layers of 3M Scotch
          Brand or approved equal rubber tape and six layers of vinyl
          plastic electrical tape.  Tap wiring to the luminaire shall
          incorporate a Bus type HEB waterproof in line fuseholder
          with this as recommended by the ballast manufacturer and
          #12 XHHW conductors.

     C.   Splices in handholes shall be supported on bricks 8 inches
          above the bottom of the handhole.  Slices shall be kept to
          a minimum and are prohibited in locations other then
          handholes, pullboxes or lighting unit bases, except for the
          purposes of retaining circuity of any existing underground
          wiring where existing poles or wiring are distributed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

     A.   Examine adjacent surfaces to determine that surfaces are
          ready to receive work.

     B.   Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps
          specified.

3.02 INSTALLATION

     A.   Install luminaries and accessories in accordance with
          manufacturers instructions.

          1.   Provide pendant accessory to mount suspended
               luminaries and exit signs.  Use swivel hanger on
               sloped ceiling.

          2.   Support surface mounted luminaries from the ceiling
               grid tee structure; provide auxiliary support laid
               across the top of ceiling tees.  Fasten to prohibit
               movement.

          3.   Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from
               below.

          4.   Install wall mounted luminaries internal and external
               as specified by the designer.

          5.   Connect luminaries, emergency lighting units and exit
               signs to the branch circuits provided.

          6.   Bond products and metal accessories to the branch
               circuit equipment grounding conductor.

          7.   Luminaire pole bases:  Construct the pole bases to
               University of Maryland standards (No exception). 
               Install poles on bases plumb; provide for adjustments.

     B.   Support luminaires independent of ceiling frame, except
          surface mounted.  Support surface mounted luminaries as
          specified above.

     C.   Luminaires shall be located clear of exit signs, speakers,
          smoke detectors, pipes, ducts and other ceiling mounted
          equipment, and any such conflicts with Reflected Ceiling
          Plan shall be resolved with the Project Architect.

     D.   Connect fluorescent luminaires to boxes or other
          fluorescent luminaires using flexible metal conduit in
          accordance with NFPA 70.  

     E.   Install lamps in luminaires, emergency lighting units, and
          exit signs.

F.   Reflectors, reflector cones, and visible trim of all lighting
     fixtures shall not be installed until completion of plastering,
     ceiling tile work, painting, and general cleanup.  They shall be
     carefully handled to avoid scratching or fingerprinting.

     G.   Open trenches shall be limited to 30 linear feet before
          backfilling.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

     A.   Align luminaries and clean lenses and diffusers at
          completion of work.

     B.   Aim adjustable luminaries and lampholders.

     C.   Adjust directional arrows on exit signs to meet approval of
          Authority Having Jurisdiction.

     D.   Clean paint splatters, dirt, and debris from installed
          luminaries.

     E.   Touch up luminaire and pole finish at completion of work.

     F.   Relamp luminaries which have failed lamps at completion of
          work.

3.04 COORDINATION

     A.   Confirm compatibility and interface of other materials with
          luminaire and ceiling system.  Report discrepancies to the
          Owner and defer.

     B.   Supply trim rings, backboxes, etc. to other trades as
          necessary.

     C.   Coordinate with Division 15 to avoid conflicts between
          luminaries, supports, fittings, and mechanical equipment.

     D.   Before ordering, confirm ceiling construction details and
          architectural finish for each area.

3.05 ACCEPTANCE

     A.   Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
          Owner that all lamps, ballasts, and exit lights are
          operating properly.  Any faulty equipment shall be replaced
          at the Contractor's expense.  The Contractor shall
          demonstrate operation of emergency lighting.



SECTION 16600                          LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

     A.   The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
          equipment and services necessary for the furnishing and
          installing of a complete Lightning Protection System.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

     A.   Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Standards for Lightning
          Protection Systems, UL 96A.

     B.   National Fire Protection Association Code for Lightning
          Protection Systems, #78.

     C.   The Lightning Protection System shall be designed and
          installed by a firm regularly engaged and experienced in
          installing Master Labeled Lightning Protection Systems and
          shall be listed with the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

     D.   The Lightning Protection System shall conform to the
          requirements of the Underwriter's Laboratories Inc.,
          Standards for Master Labeled Lightning Protection Systems,
          UL 96A, latest edition and the Master Label covering the
          existing buildings, shall be delivered to the Owner on
          completion of all work.

     E.   The Lightning Protection Installer shall issue a UL
          compliance certification suitable to present and satisfy
          any and all requirements.

1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS

     A.   The Contractor shall submit, for approval, shop drawings
          showing complete details with description of all air
          terminals, air terminal bases, conductors, conductor
          fasteners, splicers, bonding clasps, ground rods, etc. 
          Only shop drawings bearing the stamp of approval of the
          Architect shall be used by the Contractor.

1.04 WORKMANSHIP

     A.   The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and
          workmanship furnished and installed under this section of
          the specifications two years from date of final acceptance
          of the work.  The Contractor also agrees that he will, at
          his own expense, repair and/or replace all such defective
          materials or effective workmanship which become defective
          during the term of this guarantee.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

     A.   The system to be furnished under this specification shall
          be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged
          in the production of Lightning Protection Systems and shall
          be the manufacturer's latest approved design.  All material
          specified for this work shall be Underwriter's
          Laboratories, Inc. approved and shall be manufactured by
          Bonded Lightning Protection, Inc., Rockville, Maryland;
          Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc., St. Paul, Minnesota;
          Independent Protection Co., Goshen, Indiana; or Robbins
          Lightning Protection Co., Maryville, Missouri.

2.02 MATERIALS

     A.   Materials used in connection with the installation of the
          lightning protection system shall be approved for this
          system by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

2.03 CONDUCTORS

     A.   All conductors shall be bare stranded cable, 28 strands of
          14 gauge.

2.04 AIR TERMINALS

     A.   Air terminals shall be aluminum, 1/2 inch in diameter with
          tapered points; they shall extend not less than 10" above
          the object they are to protect.

2.05 FASTENERS, CLAMPS, ETC...

     A.   All fasteners, clamps, and connectors shall be bolted
          pressure type and shall be substantial in construction, not
          subject to breakage, shall be of the same material as the
          conductor or of such nature that there will be no serious
          tendency toward electrolytic corrosion in the presence of
          moisture.

2.06 GROUND RODS

     A.   Ground rods shall be 3/4 inches in diameter by 10 feet in
          length, made of copper-clad steel.  The portion of copper
          on copper-clad rods shall be approximately 27% of the
          weight of the rod.  All ground rods shall be equipped with
          Bonded Lightning Protection #107 ground reservoirs and
          shall be driven to a depth of 36 inches below finished
          grade and/or finished floor, minimum.

2.07 TEST WELL

     A.   Provide a 6 inches diameter by 24 inches terra cotta test
          well with steel covers for each ground rod.  Test wells
          shall be installed flush with the finished first floor
          and/or finished grade. Tests wells shall be Bonded
          Lightning #200.  Ground resistance test shall be performed
          on the finished system and the results submitted to the
          University of Maryland.  Grounds resistance shall not
          exceed 10 ohms on completion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

     A.   The installation of the Lightning Protection System shall
          avoid penetrations of existing building roofs.



SECTION 16610                   UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM (UPS) (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

     A.   Uninterruptible power system (UPS).

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

     A.   Components:  The UPS shall consist of the following major
          equipment.

          1.   Rectifier/Charger, Invertor, input and output
               transformers, static bypass switch, input and output
               circuit breakers located in a single cabinet or group
               of cabinets.

          2.   External maintenance bypass circuit breakers.

          3.   Battery and battery cabinet.

     B.   Modes of Operation:  The UPS shall be designed to operate
          as an on-line, fully automatic reverse transfer system in
          the following modes.

          1.   Normal:  The rectifier/battery charger shall derive
               power from the commercial AC source and supply DC
               power to the invertor while simultaneously float
               charging the battery.  The critical load shall be
               continuously supplied by the invertor.

          2.   Emergency:  Upon failure of the commercial AC power,
               the critical load shall continue to be supplied by the
               invertor which without any switching, obtains its
               power from the storage battery.  There shall be no
               interruption of power to the critical load upon
               failure or restoration of the commercial AC source.

          3.   Recharge:  Upon restoration of the commercial AC
               source, the rectifier/charger shall power the invertor
               and simultaneously recharge the battery.  This shall
               be an automatic function and shall cause no
               interruption of power to the load.

          4.   Bypass Mode:  If the UPS must be taken out of service
               for overload or internal failures, the static bypass
               switch shall automatically transfer the load without
               interruption, to the commercial AC power.  Retransfer
               of the load to the normal mode shall be automatic
               after the overload or failure has been cleared and
               reset.  Transfer to bypass shall also be initiated
               manually for maintenance or repair.

          5.   Downgrade:  If the battery needs to be taken out of
               service for maintenance, the battery shall be
               disconnected from the UPS module by means of an
               internal battery circuit breaker.  The UPS shall
               continue to function and meet all performance criteria
               specified herein, except for the reserve time
               capability.

     C.   Design Requirements:  The UPS system shall be field-upgradable 
          to 50 KVA.

1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

     A.   The UPS shall meet the requirements of the following
          standards (latest edition):

          1.   ANSI C84.1 - Voltage ratings for Electric Power
               Systems and equipment.

          2.   ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
               (1000 volts maximum).

          3.   NEMA PE1 - Uninterruptible power systems.

          4.   ANSI C 62.41/IEEE 587 - standards for surge with
               standability.

          5.   FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A.

          6.   NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

     B.   The UPS shall be UL listed under UL 1012.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

     A.   Shop Drawings:  Submit system configurations with single
          line diagrams, detailed layouts of power and control
          connections, ladder diagrams for the maintenance bypass
          scheme, and detailed installation drawings including all
          terminal locations.

     B.   Product Data:  Provide product data for UPS and battery
          including catalog sheets and technical data sheets to
          indicate electrical performance, UPS type, battery type,
          detailed equipment outlines, weight, dimensions, control
          and external wiring requirements, heat rejection and air
          flow requirements.

     C.   Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under
          provisions of Division 1.

     D.   Submit manufacturer's certificate showing that the system
          meets or exceeds the specified requirements.

     E.   Submit a copy of factory test reports to the University     ,
          before shipment of the equipment.

1.05 ENVIRONMENT CONDITIONS

     The UPS shall be able to withstand the following environmental
     conditions without damage, derating or degradation of operating
     characteristics:

     A.   Operating Ambient Temperature

          UPS: +10 C to +40 C
          Battery: +10 C to +40 C

     B.   Storage/Transport Ambient Temperatures

          UPS: -20 C to +60 C
          Battery: -20 C to +60 C

     C.   Relative Humidity (operating and storage) 0 to 95%, 
          non-condensing.

     D.   Elevation:  5,000 feet

     E.   Acoustical noise:  65 dBA to one meter from any operator
          surface, measured at full load on invertor, at 25 C.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

     A.   Manufacturer Qualifications:  Company specializing in UPS
          equipment with a minimum of three years experience in the
          design, manufacture, and testing of solid-state UPS
          systems.

     B.   Factory Testing:  The manufacturer shall fully and
          completely test the system to assure compliance with the
          specifications, before shipment.

1.07 WARRANTY

     The manufacturer shall warrant the complete Uninterruptible
     Power System against defective material and workmanship for a
     period of five (5) years and shall provide a minimum of two (2)
     preventative maintenance service calls per year by qualified
     factory service technicians during this period.  This warranty
     period shall commence with the date that the University takes
     over the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

     A.   System Efficiency:  The overall system AC to AC efficiency
          shall be determined by dividing the output power by the
          input power.  The battery shall be fully charged and
          connected.  The rectifier/battery charger shall be in the
          normal float mode.  The invertor shall be operating in the
          normal mode.

          The minimum acceptable efficiency values are 83% at 50%
          rated load, 84% at 75% rated load, 86% at 100% rated load.

     B.   Components:  All active electronic devices shall be solid-
          state and shall not exceed manufacturer recommended
          tolerances for maximum reliability.  All semiconductor
          devices shall be sealed.  Vacuum tubes shall not be used. 
          All relays shall be provided with dust covers.

     C.   Grounding:  The UPS output AC neutral shall be electrically
          isolated from the UPS chassis, battery, and main ac input.

     D.   Conductors:  All wiring, including transformers and
          inductors, and all other conductive components shall be
          copper for maximum safety and reliability.  All exposed
          copper surfaces shall be treated with a suitable permanent
          protective coating electrically equivalent to tin. 
          Aluminum wiring, foil or bus work shall not be used. 
          Aluminum shall not be used as a current carrying media. 
          Aluminum heat sinks may be used provided that no electrical
          current passes through the part.

     E.   Power Transformers:  Input and output power transformers
          shall be designed and manufactured for maximum safety,
          reliability, and efficiency.  All input and output
          transformers shall be of the isolated winding type.  All
          windings shall be copper.  Input transformer(s) shall have
          an electrostatic shield between primary and secondary
          windings for noise isolation and suppression.  Insulation
          type shall have a temperature rating that is greater than
          the highest winding temperature during worst case UPS
          operation.  All transformer connections shall be accessible
          from the front of the enclosure to facilitate periodic
          inspection and maintenance.

     F.   Materials:  All materials and parts comprising the UPS
          shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall not have
          been in prior service, except as required during factory
          testing.  All metal surfaces shall be treated with a
          corrosion inhibiting permanent protective coating.

     G.   Sag/Surge/Impulse Protection:  The UPS shall have built-in
          protection against sag/surge/impulse disturbances on both
          the main and bypass ac input sources.  These disturbances
          shall include, but not limited to, the effects of load
          transfer between the invertor and bypass ac source as well
          as low energy induced transients resulting from the proper
          operation of correctly applied lightning protection
          systems.

     H.   Reliability:  The UPS Module shall have an internal Mean
          Time Between Failure (MTBF) of not less than 50,000 hours. 
          This requirement shall be based upon actual field
          experience using representative data from all installed UPS
          models of the specified series and/or rating.  For the
          purpose of determining  specified reliability, the bypass
          AC input source shall not be used as an enhancement method.

     I.   Overtemperature Protection:  The rectifier/charger heat
          sink and the invertor heat sinks shall be protected by
          temperature sensors so that the UPS will shut down before
          any semiconductor devices are damaged by over temperature. 
          When a sensor is activated, the UPS shall transfer the
          critical load to bypass.

2.02 MANUFACTURER

     The UPS system shall be as manufactured by Exide Electronics,
     Powerware System 50, Model 20 or approved equal.

2.03 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

     The UPS shall have the following electrical characteristics:

     A.   Input

          1.   Input voltage:  480 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire.

          2.   Voltage range:  +10%, -20% without battery discharge.

          3.   Frequency:  60 Hertz, ± 5%.

          4.   Input power factors:  0.95 lag minimum.

          5.   Input current total harmonic distortion (THD): 10%
               maximum.

     B.   Output

          1.   Nominal output voltage 208/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire
               plus ground.

          2.   Frequency:  60 hertz ± 0.1%

          3.   Rating:  20 KVA, 16 KW at 0.8 p.f lagging.

2.04 COMPONENTS

     A.   Rectifier/Charger:  Incoming AC power shall be converted to
          regulated DC by the rectifier/charger.  The
          rectifier/charger shall be a phase controlled, solid-state
          type with constant voltage and constant current control
          circuitry.  The rectifier shall be provided with a timed
          walk-in circuit, with loading over a period of 15 seconds.

     B.   Invertor:  The invertor shall be transistorized, pulse-
          width-modulation design.

     C.   Static Transfer Switch and Bypass:  The static transfer
          switch and bypass shall be provided as an integral part of
          the UPS.  The control unit shall include transfer circuitry
          that senses the status of the invertor logic signals and
          alarm conditions to provide an uninterrupted transfer of
          the load to bypass.  Return to normal mode of operation
          shall be automatic, upon restoration of normal operating
          conditions, except for invertor failure or overload.

     D.   Input and Bypass Protection:  Thermal-magnetic molded case
          breakers and transient suppression circuitry shall be
          provided for input and bypass protection.

     E.   Battery and Battery Cabinet:  The stationary storage
          battery system shall be sized to meet or exceed the 100%
          UPS output requirement for a minimum of ten (10) minutes. 
          The individual battery shall be sealed, maintenance free,
          non-gassing absorbed electrolyte type with automatic/self
          sealing safety vents, heavy duty integral copper terminals,
          heavy duty lead plated copper connectors, and stainless
          steel bolts and lockwashers.  The battery shall be housed
          in a separate cabinet(s) to match UPS cabinets, with
          casters and leveling feet.  Battery shall have minimum 10
          years expected life covered by warranty through the
          manufacturer.  Battery short circuit protection shall be
          provided by a molded case circuit breaker located in the
          battery cabinet.

     F.   Control and Monitoring Panel:  The UPS shall be equipped
          with control and monitoring panel that provides metering,
          monitoring, and control functions.  An Emergency Power Off
          (EPO) pushbutton shall be located on the control and
          monitoring panel.

     G.   Remote Monitor Panel:  A remote monitor panel shall be
          provided and shall be connected to the UPS via the RMP
          interface.  A panel shall have a local audible alarm horn
          and three user selectable alarm indicators.

     H.   Input Filter:  An input filter with power factor correction
          shall be provided in a matching cabinet.

     I.   External Maintenance Bypass Circuit Breakers and Enclosure:
          A separate maintenance bypass shall be provided to allow
          complete isolation of the load from the UPS.  The bypass
          scheme shall consist of two non-automatic, molded case
          circuit breakers provided in a separate NEMA 1 enclosure. 
          The operation of the external bypass breakers shall be
          enabled only when the UPS is in bypass mode.  The closing
          of the invertor output contractor or breaker shall be
          inhibited during the transfer or retransfer operation. 
          Kirk Key interlocks with two sets of keys shall be provided
          such that only one breaker can be in the open position at
          all times and power supply to the load is never
          interrupted.

     J.   Remote Alarm Panel:  A remote alarm panel shall be
          provided, and shall be connected to the UPS.  A summary
          alarm dry contact shall be provided on the UPS for
          indicating any alarm condition at the new alarm panel to be
          located in the telecommunication switch room in the
          existing building.  The sequence of operations in the alarm
          panel shall be as follows:  One green indicating light
          shall display the systems normal; the alarm condition shall
          flash the red indicating light and sound the local alarm
          horn; the acknowledge pushbutton shall stop the horn and
          the light shall be steady on until the panel is reset; the
          reset button shall return the panel to normal only after
          the alarm condition on the UPS has been cleared.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

     A.   The UPS system shall be installed in the UPS room. The
          remote monitor panel and the remote alarm panel shall be
          provided as per University requirement.

3.02 TESTING

     A.   Before application of primary power, all connections shall
          be verified for correct phase rotation.

     B.   The Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary for
          load testing including a load bank equivalent to the full
          capacity of the UPS.  Any additional ventilation required
          shall be provided by the contractor.

          1.   Pre-Start-Up Tests:  All manufacturer required or
               suggested "Prestart-up Tests" shall be performed.

          2.   Primary Power Application:  Primary power shall be
               applied only after the successful completion of the
               "Pre-start-up Tests".  Primary power shall be applied
               for a minimum of seventy-two (72) hours with the dummy
               load operating, prior to the initiation of additional
               required tests.  During this period of operation, all
               functions of the UPS shall be continuously monitored. 
               The load testing of the system with load bank shall be
               conducted only once.  Run down time and battery back-up 
               shall be monitored and verified as well as the
               recharge time of the batteries as specified or as
               listed by manufacturer as minimum.

          3.   Operational Tests:  After the initial seventy-two (72)
               hours of operation, the Contractor, under the
               direction of a skilled and qualified technical
               representative of the manufacturer, shall non-harmfully 
               induce conditions necessary to successfully
               test and assure the proper operation of all alarms,
               overrides, transfers and/or bypasses.

          4.   Final Acceptance Test:  The UPS shall have been in
               service for at least thirty (30) days prior to the
               final inspection.  The Contractor shall notify the
               Construction Manager in writing within five (5)
               working days prior to the date of the final acceptance
               tests.  The UPS shall be considered ready for such
               testing only after all necessary preliminary tests
               have been made and all defects and deficiencies found
               have been corrected to the satisfaction of the
               equipment manufacturer's technical representative. 
               The UPS shall be acceptance tested in the presence of
               representatives of the manufacturer, the Construction
               Manager, the University of Maryland, College Park. The
               Contractor shall furnish all instruments, labor and
               materials required for the tests; and the technician
               who supervised the installation shall conduct the
               tests.  Any deficiencies found shall be corrected and
               the UPS retested at no cost to the University.  All
               tests shall be repeated as directed by the
               Construction Manager during final acceptance testing
               period to his satisfaction at no additional cost.

          5.   Additional Tests:  When deficiencies, defects normal
               functions develop during required testing, all further
               testing of the UPS shall be suspended until proper
               adjustments, repairs, corrections or revisions have
               been made to assure proper performance of the system. 
               If these adjustments, repairs, corrections or
               revisions require more than a nominal delay, the
               observers as herein before indicated shall be notified
               when the additional work has been completed to arrange
               a time for a new final inspection and test of the
               equipment involved.  All tests required shall be
               repeated prior to final acceptance, unless directed
               otherwise.

          6.   Maintenance Instructions:  Submit to the Construction
               Manager with the initial notification of final
               acceptance testing, a complete set of reproducible 
               as-built, approved wiring and interconnection wiring
               diagrams with four (4) sets of copies, and four (4)
               complete sets of maintenance manuals.  This is in
               addition to the requirements of Division 1.

          7.   Instruction of Owner's Personnel:  Upon completion of
               the work and at a time designated by the Construction
               Manager, designated personnel at the activity shall
               receive a complete training session of 20 hours,
               comparable to the equipment manufacturer's factory
               training procedure.  The training shall include an
               explanation and review of the theory of operation, the
               function, description, analysis, and the trouble-
               shooting of all equipment provided.  Training shall
               include a review of manuals, drawings, and lists
               supplied, together with any clarifications required. 
               At least one period of eight hours shall be spent
               demonstrating routine maintenance procedures and
               trouble-shooting equipment with actual faults being
               introduced for training purposes.   The instruction
               personnel shall be factory certified by the related
               equipment manufacturer to provide instruction
               services.  The training shall take placed at the site.



SECTION 16620                     STAND-BY ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM (2.15.97)


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

     A.   ENGINE GENERATOR SET

     B.   AUTOMATIC LOAD TRANSFER CONTROL

     C.   REMOTE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR

     D.   START/STOP CONTROL SYSTEM

     E.   ACCESSORIES

1.02 RELATED WORK

     A.   Refer to Division 15 for fuel supply system and exhaust
          piping.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

     A.   Shop Drawings:  Provide detailed drawings of the stand-by
          generator and associated equipment showing certified
          dimensions, weights, and all connections (conduit, wiring,
          and piping) to remote equipment.  Also provide complete
          elementary circuits and devices and automatic transfer
          switch internal wiring interconnection diagrams with engine
          start/stop control wiring clearly indicated.

     B.   Product Data:  Provide manufacturer's data on engine
          generator set, automatic transfer and bypass isolation
          switches, and remote alarm annunciator.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

     A.   All parts of the stand-by electrical power system shall
          meet NEMA and ASME standards, be UL listed, and bear the UL
          label of approval.  The system shall be installed to meet
          the requirements of national, state, and local codes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DESCRIPTION

     A.   The stand-by electrical power system shall be an engine
          generator set rated for continuous stand-by service at
          277/480 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 0.8 power factor, 60 hertz. 
          The minimum KW capacity of the electric plant shall be
          115KW or next higher nominal size.  The actual KW capacity
          of the electric plant, rating of all related devices and
          accessories shall be selected by the designer based on the
          load analysis of equipment connected. The system shall be
          a package of new and current equipment consisting of:

          1.   A natural gas driven electric plant to provide
               emergency electric power.

          2.   An automatic load transfer control including an
               automatic transfer switch, and bypass isolation switch
               to provide automatic starting and stopping of the
               plant and switching of the load.

          3.   Mounted accessories as specified.

          4.   Engine mounted start/stop control system.

          5.   Remote annunciator.

2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

     A.   Engine

          1.   The engine shall be natural gas fueled, four cycle,
               water cooled with mounted radiator, fan, and water
               pump.  It shall have eight cylinders.  The engine
               shall have a replaceable full-flow oil filters,
               gaseous fuel pressure regulation, solenoid valve, and
               dry type air cleaners.  Engine speed shall be governed
               by a isychromic electronic governor to maintain 
               alternator frequency within 3 cycles from no-load to
               full-load alternator output.  The engine shall have a
               24/volt DC battery charger automatically controlled by
               a two step voltage regulator.  Starting shall be by a
               24-volt electric starter.

          2.   The engine instrument panel shall contain an oil
               pressure gauge, water temperature gauge, and battery
               charger rate ammeter.

          3.   The complete engine shall be provided with a start
               control which operates on closing contact and a stop
               control which operates on opening contact.  A cranking
               limiter shall be provided to open the starting circuit
               in approximately 45 seconds if the engine is not
               started within that time.  The electric plant controls
               shall include a preheat switch where required and a 
               3-position selector switch with the following positions: 
               RUN-STOP-REMOTE.  High water temperature and low oil
               pressure shutdown with signal light and alarm terminal
               shall be provided.

     B.   Alternator

          1.   The alternator shall be a 4-pole revolving field type
               with static exciter and magnetic amplifier voltage
               regulator.  No commutator or commutator brushes shall
               be allowed.  The stator shall be directly connected to
               the engine flywheel housing, and the rotor shall be
               driven through a rigid coupling to insure permanent
               alignment.  Voltage regulation shall be within plus or
               minus 3% or rated voltage, from no-load to full-load. 
               The instantaneous voltage dip shall be less than 12%
               of rated voltage when full-load and rated power factor
               is applied to the alternator.  Recovery to stable
               operation shall occur within two seconds.  Stable or
               steady-state operation is defined as operation with
               terminal voltage remaining constant within plus or
               minus 1% of rated voltage, from no load to full load. 
               Temperature rise shall be within rating as defined by
               NEMA MG1-22.40.

          2.   The alternator instrument panel shall be wired,
               tested, and shock mounted on the generating set by the
               manufacturer of the alternator.  It shall contain
               panel lighting; manual reset circuit breaker;
               frequency meter; running time meter, voltage adjusting
               rheostat; AC ammeter (2% accuracy); AC voltmeter (2%
               accuracy); ammeter selector switch (four position;
               OFF, A, B, C); voltmeter selector switch with phase to
               phase and phase to neutral positions for three phases. 
               The panel shall be complete with a load circuit
               breaker designed to properly protect the generator and
               its feeders.  Include battery-voltage operated shunt
               trip connection to open the circuit breaker on engine
               failure.  The necessary instrument transformers for
               metering shall be provided with suitable access panels
               for easy servicing.

     C.   The electric generating set shall be mounted on a welded
          steel base which shall provide for suitable mounting to any
          level surface.  Provide spring type vibration isolators
          with internal leveling bolts and rib rubber sound pads of
          number and size required for total weight of unit between
          steel base and mounting pad.  The vibration isolators shall
          provide 95% isolation.

     D.   The engine generator set shall be as manufactured by Onan
          or approved equal.

     E.   Automatic Load Transfer Control

          1.   The complete control shall be tested by the
               manufacturer.

          2.   It shall include the necessary relays and component
               parts, together with an automatic transfer switch
               (ATS).  The ATS shall provide the following features:

               a.   The switch shall be of the electrically operated
                    mechanically held type.

               b.   Main contact shall be mechanically locked in
                    position to prevent burning or welding under
                    short circuit conditions.

               c.   Main contacts shall be silver surfaced and
                    protected by separate arcing contacts, magnetic
                    blowout coils, and separate arc chutes on all
                    poles or other provision for inductive load
                    rating.

               d.   All contacts and coils shall be readily
                    accessible for replacement from the front of the
                    panel without major disassembly of associated
                    parts.

               e.   The automatic transfer switch shall include
                    adjustable solid-state sensing and timing
                    functions.  The following operational
                    characteristics shall be provided:

                    1.   Time delay on momentary dips in normal
                         source (0.5 - 6.0 seconds), factory set a 1
                         second.

                    2.   Time delay on transfer to emergency for
                         controlled loading of generator (0-1
                         minute), factory set at 0 minutes.

                    3.   Time delay on retransfer to normal (0-30
                         minutes), factory set at 15 minutes.

                    4.   Time delay on engine shutdown after
                         retransfer to normal (0-5 minutes) factory
                         set at 5 minutes.

                    5.   Close differential voltage sensing of all
                         normal source phases (pickup adjustable
                         from 85-100% of nominal and dropout
                         adjustable from 75-98% of pickup), factory
                         set to pickup at 95% of nominal frequency.

                    6.   Independent voltage (85-100% pickup), and
                         frequency (90-100% pickup), sensing of the
                         emergency source to prevent premature
                         transfer, factory set to pickup at 90% of
                         nominal voltage, and 95% of nominal
                         frequency.

                    7.   The automatic transfer switch shall be
                         arranged so that an auxiliary contact will
                         close to initiate engine starting controls
                         when any phase of the normal source is
                         reduced to 85% or less of rated value for
                         more than one second.

          3.   Automatic Transfer switch shall be equipped with a
               Bypass Isolation Switch.

               a.   Each automatic transfer switch and bypass
                    isolation switch provided shall manually permit
                    convenient electrical bypass and isolation of its
                    automatic transfer switch.  Bypass of the load to
                    either the normal or emergency power source with
                    complete isolation of the automatic transfer
                    switch shall be possible regardless of the status
                    of the automatic transfer switch.  The bypass
                    isolation switch shall permit proper operation by
                    one person through the movement of a maximum of
                    two handles at a common dead front panel.

               b.   Provisions shall be made to assure continuity of
                    auxiliary circuits necessary for the proper
                    operation of the system.  If it is necessary to
                    manually change the position of the transfer
                    switch to accomplish this procedure, then the
                    transfer switch shall have an exterior mounted
                    manual operator.  The contact-to-contact
                    operating speed of the transfer switch shall be
                    the same as the electrical operator.

               c.   Operation:

                    1.   The automatic transfer and bypass isolation
                         switch shall provide manual bypass of the
                         load and isolation of all service and load
                         terminals of the automatic transfer switch
                         to permit periodic testing, maintenance,
                         and service of the automatic transfer
                         switch without interrupting power to the
                         load.

                    2.   The isolation handle shall provide three
                         positions:  "closed", "test", and "open". 
                         The "test" position shall permit electrical
                         testing of the automatic transfer switch
                         without disturbing the load.  The "open"
                         position shall completely isolate the
                         transfer switch from both lines and load
                         without actual removal of the line or load
                         conductors, and allow its removal for
                         inspection, adjustment, and maintenance. 
                         Also while in the "test" or "open"
                         positions, the bypass switch shall function
                         as a manual transfer switch to allow load
                         transfer to either source of power
                         regardless of the position or condition of
                         the transfer switch, including the
                         condition when the automatic transfer
                         switch is removed, and without reconnecting
                         the load terminals of the transfer switch.

          4.   The automatic transfer and bypass isolation switches
               shall be listed per Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.,
               Standard for Safety UL-1008.

          5.   The switches shall be four pole.  The ampere rating of
               the transfer and bypass isolation switches shall be
               selected by the Designer and shall be sufficient to
               handle the capacity of the generator and loads being
               transferred.

          6.   Colored indicating lights shall be provided on the
               enclosure door to indicate transfer switch position
               (green--normal source, red--emergency). 

          7.   Meter packing, 7 day exercise clock, battery float
               charger, auxiliary relays, and auxiliary contact for
               CCMS systems shall be provided.

          8.   Automatic transfer switch shall be provided with test
               switch to simulate failure of normal source.

          9.   The switches shall be as manufactured by ASCO or
               approved equal.

     F.   Remote Annunciator

          1.   Remote annunciator with momentary contact silencing
               button shall be provided, powered by the engine
               starting battery and operating in conjunction with the
               automatic starting panel.  The annunciator shall
               indicate alarm conditions as follows:

               a.   Individual signals shall be provided for engine
                    running, and high/low battery voltage.

               b.   Individual visual signals plus a common audible
                    signal to warn of following alarm conditions:

                    High oil temperature 
                    Low oil pressure
                    Low water jacket temperature
                    Overcrank
                    Overspeed
                    Engine failure

          2.   Annunciator shall be surface mounted and shall be of
               the same manufacturer as the starting panel.

     G.   Accessories needed for proper operation of the generator
          set shall be furnished.  These shall include, but not be
          limited to, the following:

          1.   Critical grade exhaust silencing muffler.

          2.   Flexible exhaust connectors.

          3.   24 volt heavy duty lead acid starting batteries.

          4.   Plastic coated battery rack treated for electrolyte
               resistance and cables. 

          5.   Battery charger.

          6.   Lubricating oil temperature gauge.

          7.   Lubricating oil pressure gauge.

          8.   Water temperature gauge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

     A.   The Contractor shall install complete the stand-by
          generator, transfer, and bypass isolation switches,
          batteries, and piping, exhaust system, vibration isolation,
          cooling system, electric system, concrete pad, and
          accessories in accordance with the stand-by generator
          manufacturer's recommendations.

     B.   Electrical Contractor shall provide a 4-inch high concrete
          base for the generator set.

     C.   Electrical Contractor shall ground the generator set as per
          the National Electric Code.

     D.   A composite wiring diagram of the entire emergency transfer
          system showing all wiring between the engine starting panel
          engine-generator set, and the automatic transfer switch
          shall be pasted inside the compartment door of transfer
          switch and in the generator control panel.

3.02 GENERATOR TESTS

     A.   Complete generator shall be tested for 4 hours continuously
          at full load at the manufacturer's factory.  Certified
          copies of the data obtained during these tests shall be
          submitted in quadruplicate.

     B.   Final field tests shall be conducted at the site, after
          installation has been completed.  The Contractor shall have
          the manufacturer of the generator provide services of a
          capable engineer to operate the system during test, to
          check all details of installation, and to instruct the
          University personnel.  This engineer shall be required for
          a period of not less than 2 days for instruction and tests
          and all costs in connection therewith shall be borne by the
          Contractor.

     C.   Field test shall include operating the plant at full load
          with load bank for a minimum of 4 hours and until
          temperatures have been stable for one hour.  The Contractor
          shall furnish the load bank, lubricants, and instruments
          required to determine output of generator, oil temperature,
          oil pressure, cooling water temperature, fuel consumption,
          and load shall be recorded at one half hour intervals.

     D.   Field test shall also include demonstration of functioning
          of all safety controls and alarms and starting battery
          test.  Four sets of field test reports shall be submitted
          to the University.


3.03 WARRANTY

     A.   The warranty for the complete stand-by electric power
          system against defective material and workmanship shall be
          for a period of five (5) years.  The warranty must be
          provided by the system manufacturer and shall commence form
          the date that the University takes over the building. 
          Multiple warranties for individual components will not be
          acceptable.  Satisfactory warranty documents shall be
          provided.



SECTION 16630                STANDBY DIESEL ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

     A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
          General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
          Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

     A.   This Section includes a packaged diesel engine generator
          system including engine generator set, cooling system, fuel
          system, combustion air intake and engine exhaust systems,
          starting system, and the following additional features:

          1.   Weatherproof housing.

     B.   Related Sections:  The following Sections contain
          requirements that relate to this Section:

          1.   Division 16 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer
               switches, including sensors and relays, to initiate
               automatic starting and stopping signals for enginer
               generator set.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

     A.   Emergency or Standby Rating:  Power output rating equal to
          the power the generator set delivers continuously under
          normally varying load factors for the duration of a power
          outage, with capability for a minimum overload of 10
          percent of the rating for 2 continuous hours out of 24
          continuous operating hours.

     B.   Operational Bandwidth:  The total variation from the lowest
          to the highest value of a parameter over the range of
          conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the
          nominal value of the parameter.

     C.   Power Output Rating:  Gross electrical power output of
          generator set minus total power requirements of electric
          motor-driven accessories normally constituting part of the
          engine assembly.

     D.   Steady-State Voltage Modulation:  The uniform cyclical
          variation of voltage within the operational bandwidth,
          expressed in Hz or cycles per second.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

     A.   System Includes:  Standby-rated, automatically started
          deisel engine coupled to an a.c. generator unit.  Engine
          and generator are factory-mounted and -aligned on a
          structural steel skid.  Subsystems and auxiliary components
          and equipment are as indicated.

     B.   Functional Description:  When the mode selector switch on
          the control and monitoring panel is in the "automatic"
          position, remote control contacts in one or more separate
          automatic transfer switches initiate the starting and
          stopping of the generator set.  When the mode selector
          switch is placed in the "on" position, the generator set
          starts manually.  The "off" position of the same switch
          initiates shutdown of the generator set.  When the unit is
          running, specified system or equipment failures or
          derangements automatically shut the unit down and initiate
          alarms.  Operation of a remote emergency stop switch also
          shuts down the unit.  Automatic transfer switches are
          specified in another Section of these Specifications.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

     A.   General:  Submit the following according to Conditions of
          Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

     B.   Product data for products specified in this lSection. 
          Include data on features, components, ratings, and
          performance.  Include dimensioned outline plan and
          elevation drawings of enginer generator set and other
          system components.

     C.   Maintenance data for system and components for inclusionin
          Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.

          Include the following:

          1.   Lists:  Tools, test equipment, spare parts, and
               replacement items recommended to be stored at the site
               for ready access.  Include part and drawing numbers,
               current unit prices, and source of supply.  

          2.   Detailed Operating Instructions:  Cover operation
               under both normal and abnormal conditions.

     D.   Shop Drawings:  Detail fabrication, piping, wiring, and
          installation of the field-installed portions of the system. 
          Include general arrangement drawings showing locations of
          auxiliary components in relation to the engine generator
          set and duct, piping, and wiring connections between the
          generator set and the auxiliary equipment.  Show
          connections, mounting, and support provisions and access
          and working space requirements.

     E.   Wiring Diagrams for System:  Show power and control
          connections and distinguish between factory-installed and
          field-installed wiring.

     F.   Qualification Data for Manufacturer:  Include capabilities
          and experience data required to demonstrate qualifications
          specified in Quality Assurance Article.  Include list of
          completed projects with project names and addresses and
          names of Engineers and Owners, plus other information
          specified.  Include spearate data for each of the following
          items:

          1.   Engine Generator System.
          2.   Engine Generator Set.
          3.   Remote Radiator.

     G.   Independent Field-Testing Organization Certificates: 
          Signed by Contractor, certifying that the organization
          complies with the requirements specified in Quality
          Assurance below.

     H.   Certified Summary of Prototype Unit Test Report:  Submit
          certified copies of actual prototype unit test report if
          subsequently requested. 

     I.   Certified Test Reports of Components and Accessories: 
          Submit for devices that are equivalent, but not identical.,
          to those tested on prototype unit.

     J.   Exhaust Emissions Test Report.

     K.   Certification of Torsional Vibration Compatibility: 
          Conform to NFPA 110.

     L.   Factory Test Reports:  For units to be shipped for this
          Project showing evidence of compliance with specified
          requirements.

     M.   Field Test Report:  Record of tests specified in Part 3.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

     A.   Manufacturer Qualifications:  Firms experienced in
          manufacturing equipment of the types and capacities
          indicated that have a record of successful in-service
          performance.

          1.   Emergency Service:  System manufacturer maintains a
               service center capable of providing training, parts,
               and emergency maintenance and repairs at the project
               site with four (4) hours maximum response time.

     B.   Independent Field-Testing Organization Qualifications:  To
          qualify for acceptance, and independent testing
          organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of
          organization-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699,
          that is has the experience and capability to conduct the
          indicated testing satisfactorily. 

     C.   Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

     D.   Comply with NFPA 110, "Standard for Emergency and Standby
          Power Systems," for requirements for a Level 1 emergency
          power supply system.

     E.   NRTL Listing:  System components of types and ratings for
          which NRTL listing or labeling services is established and
          components are listed and labeled.

          1.   The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled":  As defined in the
               "National Electrical Code," Article 100.

          2.   Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications:  A
               "Nationally recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as
               defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

     F.   Engine Exhaust Emissions:  Comply with applicable Federal,
          State, and local government requirements.

     G.   Single-Source Responsibility:  Obtain engine generator
          system components from a single manufacturer with
          responsibility for entire system.  Unit shall be a
          representative product built from components that have
          proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to
          operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype
          testing.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

     A.   Deliver engine generator set and system components to their
          final locations in protective wrappings, containers, and
          other protection that will exclude dirt and mositure and
          prevent damage from construction operations.  Remove
          protection only after equipment is made safe from such
          hazards.

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS

     A.   Furnish extra materials matching products installed, as
          described below, packaged with protective covering for
          storage, and identified with labels describing contents. 
          Deliver extra materials to the Owner.

          1.   Fuses:  1 for every 10 of each type and rating, but
               not less than 1 of each.
          2.   Pilot Lights:  2 for every 6 of each type used, but
               not less than 2 of each.
          3.   Filters:  1 set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and
               combustion air filters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

     A.   Available Manufacturers:  Subject to compliance with
          requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
          incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,
          the following:

          1.   Engine Generator Sets:

               a.   Caterpillar, Inc.
               b.   Cooper Industries, Ajax-Superior.
               c.   Detroit Diesel Corp.
               d.   DMT Corp.
               e.   Generac Corp.
               f.   Kohler Co.
               g.   Magnetek Century Electric.
               h.   Nissan Marine and Power Products.
               i.   Onan Corp, Electrical Products Div.

          2.   Day Tanks Systems:

               a.   Euclid Equipment, Inc.
               b.   Katolight Corp.
               c.   Tiernay Turbines, Inc.

          3.   Storage Batteries:

               a.   C&D Charter Power Systems.
               b.   Chloride Systems.
               c.   Exide Corp.
               d.   Hoppecke Battery Systems, Inc.
               e.   NIFE, Inc., NIFE, AB.
               f.   SAFT America, Inc., Advanced Battery Systems Div.
               g.   Sonnenschein Batteries, Inc.
               h.   Yuasa Battery (American), Inc.

          4.   Battery Chargers:

               a.   C&D Charter Power Systems.
               b.   DMT Corp.
               c.   Exide Corp.
               d.   Homelite Div. of Textron, Inc.
               e.   Hoppecke Battery Systems, Inc.
               f.   Katolight Corp.
               g.   Kohler Co.
               h.   LaMarche Mfg. Co.
               i.   Master Control Systems, Inc.
               j.   Onan Corp.

2.02 SYSTEM SERVICE CONDITIONS

     A.   Environmental Conditions:  Engine generator system
          withstands the following environmental conditions without
          mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of
          performance capability:

          1.   Ambient Temperature:  Minus 15 deg C to plus 40 deg C.
          2.   Relative Humidity:  0 to 95 percent.
          3.   Altitude:  Sea level to 1000 feet (300 m).

     B.   Unusual Service Conditions:  Engine generator system
          operates in the following conditions:

2.03 ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM

     A.   General:  System is a coordinated assembly of compatible
          components.

     B.   Ratings:  Voltage, frequency, and power output ratings of
          the system are as indicated.

     C.   Output Connections:  3 phase, 4 wire.

     D.   Safety Standard:  Comply with ASME B15.1, "Safety Standard
          for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus."

     E.   Nameplates:  Each major system component is equipped with
          a conspicuous nameplate of the component manufacturer. 
          Nameplate identifies manufacturer of origin and address,
          and the model and serial number of the item.

     F.   Resistance to Seismic Forces:  Internal and external
          supports for components, supports, and fastenings for
          batteries, wiring, and piping are designed to withstand
          static or anticipated seismic forces, or both, in any
          direction.  For each item, use a minimum force value equal
          to the weight of the item.

     G.   Limiting dimensions indicated for system components are not
          exceeded.

2.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

     A.   Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth:  4 percent of
          rated output voltage from no load to full load.

     B.   Steady-State Voltage Modulation:  Less than 1 Hz.

     C.   Transient Voltage Performance:  Not more than 10 percent
          variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. 
          Voltage recovers to remain within the steady-state
          operating band within 2 seconds.

     D.   Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth:  0.5 percent
          of rated frequency from no load to full load.

     E.   Steady-State Frequency Stability:  When the system is
          operating at any constant load within the rated load, there
          are no random speed variations outside the steady-state
          operational band and no regular or cyclical hunting or
          surging of speed.

     F.   Transient Frequency Performance:  Less than 3 Hz variation
          for a 50 percent step-load increase or decrease.  Frequency
          recovers to remain within the steady-state operating band
          within 3 seconds.

     G.   Output Waveform:  At no load, the harmonic content measured
          line-to-line or line-to-neutral does not exceed 5 percent
          total and 3 percent for single harmonics.  The telephone
          influence factor determined according to NEMA MG1, "Motors
          and Generators," does not exceed 50.

     H.   Sustained Short-Circuit Current:  For a 3-phase bolted
          short circuit at the system output terminals, the system
          will supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load
          current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the
          fault automatically, without damage to any generator system
          component.

     I.   Temperature Rise of generator:  Within acceptable limits
          for insulation systems used according to NEMA MG1 when
          operating continuously at standby rating conditions,
          including 2 hours per 24 hours at 110 percent of rated
          capacity.

     J.   Nonlinear Load Performance:  System performance is not
          degraded from that specified in this Article by continuous
          operation, with the load current having a minimum total
          harmonic content of 15 percent rms, and minimum single
          harmonic content of 10 percent rms.

     K.   Starting Time:  Maximum total time period for a cold start,
          with ambient temperature at the low end of the specified
          range, is 5 seconds.  Time period includes output voltage
          and frequency settlement within specified steady-state
          bands.

2.05 ENGINE GENERATOR SET

     A.   Power Output Rating:  Nominal ratings as indicated, with
          capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by
          records of prototype testing.

     B.   Skid:  Adequate strength and rigidity to maintain alignment
          of the mounted components without dependence on a concrete
          foundation.  Skid is free from sharp edges and corners.
          Lifting attachments are arranged to facilitate lifting with
          slings without damaging any components.

     C.   Rigging Diagram:  Inscribed on a metal plate permanently
          attached to the skid.  Diagram indicates location and
          lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and location of
          the center of gravity.

2.06 ENGINE

     A.   Comply with NFPA 37, "Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas
          Turbines."

     B.   Fuel:  Diesel fuel oil grade DF-2.

     C.   Maximum speeds:     Engine - 1800 rpm.  Piston speed for 
          2-cycle engines - 1725 feet per minute.  Piston speed for 
          4-cycle engines - 2250 feet per minute.

     D.   Lubrication System:  Pressurized by a positive displacement
          pump driven from the engine crankshaft.  The following
          items are mounted on the engine or skid:

          1.   Filter and Strainer:  Rated to remove 90 percent of
               particles 5 microns and smaller while passing full
               flow.  
          2.   Oil Cooler:  Maintains libricating oil at the
               manufacturer's recommended optimum temperature
               throughout 2 hours of operation of the generator set
               at 110 percent of system power output rating.
          3.   Thermostatic Control Valve:  Controls flow in the
               system to maintain optimum oil temperature.  Unit is
               capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.
          4.   Crankcase Drain:  Arranged for complete gravity
               drainage to an easily removable container with no
               disassembly and without the use of pumps or siphons or
               special tools or appliances.

     E.   Engine Fuel System:  Comply with NFPA 30, "Flammable and
          Combustible Liquids."  System includes:

          1.   Integral Injection Pumps:  Driven by the engine
               camshaft.  Pumps are adjustable for timing and
               cylinder pressure balancing.
          2.   Main Fuel Pump:  Mounted on the engine.  Pump ensures
               adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load
               conditions.
          3.   Parallel Fuel Oil Filters:  Ahead of the injection
               pumps.  Changover valves allow independent use of
               either filter.
          4.   Reief/Bypass Valve:  Automatically regulates pressure
               in the fuel line and returns excess fuel to the
               source.

     F.   Jacket Coolant Heater:  Electric immersion type, factory-
          installed in the jacket coolant system.  Unit is rated and
          thermostatically controlled to maintain an engine
          temperature of 25 deg C at the low end of the ambient
          temperature range specified under "Environmental
          Conditions" above.

     G.   Speed Governor:  Adjustable isochronous type, with speed
          sensing.

2.07 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

     A.   Description:  Closed-loop, liquid-cooled, with radiator
          factory-mounted on engine generator set skid and integral
          engine-driven coolant pumping.

     B.   Radiator:  Factory-piped and -rated for specified coolant.

     C.   Coolant:  Solution of 50 percent ethylene glycol and 50
          percent water.

     D.   Expansion Tank:  Constructed of welded steel plate and
          equipped with gage glass and petcock.  Capacity is as
          indicated.

     E.   Temperature Control:  Self-contained thermostatic control
          valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain
          optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by the
          engine manufacturer.  Features include:

          1.   Thermostatic Elements:  Interchangeable and
               nonadjustable.
          2.   Actuator Design:  Normally-open valves to return to
               open position when actuator fails.

     F.   Coolant Hose:  Flexible assembly with nonporous rubber
          inside surface and aging, ultraviolet, and abrasion-
          resistant fabric outer covering.

          1.   Rating:  50 psi (345 kPa) maximum working pressure
               with 180 deg F (82 degC) coolant, and noncollapsible
               under vacuum.
          2.   End Fittings:  Flanges or steel pipe nipples with
               clamps to suit piping and equipment connections.

2.08 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM

     A.   System complies with NFPA 30, "Flammable and Combustible
          Liquids Code," and NFPA 37, "Standard for Stationary
          Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines."

     B.   Day Tank:  Factory-fabricated assembly of NRTL-listed fuel
          tank with integral, float-controlled transfer pump and the
          features described below.

          1.   Tank Capacity:  As indicated.
          2.   Tank Capacity:  Adequate to supply fuel to the engine
               for an uninterrupted period of 4 hours operation at
               100 perdent of rated power output of the engine
               generator system without being refilled.
          3.   Pump Capacity:  Exceeds the maximum flow of fuel drawn
               by the engine-mounted fuel supply pump at 110 percent
               of rated capacity, including feul returned from the
               engine.  
          4.   Unit, Including Alarm Contacts:  Complies with UL 142,
               "Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
               Liquids."
          5.   Low-Level Alarm Sensor:  Separate device operates
               alarm contacts at 75 percent of normal fuel level.
          6.   High-Level Alarm Sensor:  Separate device operates
               alarm and redundant fuel shut-off contacts at 106
               percent of normal fuel level.
          7.   Piping Connections:  Include fuel suction and return
               lines to fuel storage tank, fuel supply, and return
               lines to engine, local fuel fill, vent line, overflow
               line, and tank drain line complete with shutoff valve.

     C.   Redundant High-Level Fuel Shutoff:  Actuated by the high-
          level alarm sensor in the day tank.  It operates a separate
          motor disconnect device that disconnects the day tank pump
          motor.  It also closes a solenoid valve in the fuel suction
          line from the fuel storage tank to the day tank.  Both
          items remain in the shut-off state until manually reset. 
          Shutoff action initiates an alarm signal to the control
          panel, but does not shut down the engine generator set.

     D.   Fuel Piping:  As specified in Division 15 Section "Fuel Oil
          Piping Systems."

2.08 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM

     A.   Muffler:  Industrial-type, sized as recommended by the
          engine manufacturer.  Measured sound level in the 20-75 Hz
          frequency band, according to the "DEMA Test Code for the
          Measurement of Sound from Heavy-Duty Reciprocating Engines"
          at a distance of 25 feet from the exhaust discharfe, is 87
          dB or less.

     B.   Connections from Engine to Exhaust System:  Flexible
          section of corrugated stainless steel pipe.

     C.   Connection from Exhaust Pipe to Muffler:  Stainless-steel
          expansion joint with liners.

     D.   Supports for Muffler and Exhaust Piping:  Vibration
          isolating-type specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration
          Control."

     E.   Thimbles for Exhaust Piping:  Conform to NFPA 211,
          "Chimneys, Fireplaces, vents, and Solid-Fuel Burning
          Appliances."

2.10 COMBUSTION AIR-INTAKE SYSTEM

     A.   Air-Intake silencer:  Filter-type providing filtration as
          recommended by the engine manufacturer.

          1.   Sound level emanating from the air intake measured as
               specified in the "DEMA Test Code for the Measurement
               of Sound form Heavy-Duty Reciprocating Engines" at a
               distance of 25 feet is 54 dB or less in the 1200-4800
               Hz frequency band and 56 dB or less in the 4800-10,000
               Hz band.
          2.   Mounting:  Factory-installed on engine generator set
               at a location readily accessible for servicing.

     B.   Supports for Filter-Silencer:  Vibration isolation-type as
          specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration Control."

2.11 STARTING SYSTEM

     A.   Description:  12 V electric with negative ground and
          including the following items:

          1.   Components:  Sized so they will not be damaged during
               a full engine-cranking cycle with the abmient
               temperature at the maximum specified in paragraph
               "Environmental lConditions."
          2.   Cranking Motor:  Heavy-duty unit that automatically
               engages and releases from the engine flywheel without
               binding.
          3.   Cranking Cycle:  As required by NFPA 110 for system
               level specified.
          4.   Cranking Cycle:  60 seconds.
          5.   Battery complies with SAE J537, "Storage Batteries,"
               and has adequate capacity within the ambient
               temperature range specified in paragraph
               "Environmental Conditions" to provide the specified
               cranking cycle series at least twice without
               recharging.
          6.   Battery Cable:  Size as recommended by the generator
               set manufacturer for the cable length indicated. 
               Include required interconnecting conductors and
               connection accessories.

          7.   Battery Compartment:  Factory-fabricated of metal with
               acid-resistant finish and thermal insulation. 
               Thermostatically controlled heater is arranged to
               maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external
               ambient temperature within range specified under
               "Environmental Conditions."  Include accessories
               required to support and fasten batteries in place.
          8.   Battery-Charging Alternator:  Factory-mounted on
               engine with solid-state voltage-regulation and 35
               ampere minimum continuous rating.
          9.   Battery Charger:  Current limiting, automatic
               equalizing and float charging-type designed for
               operation from a 120 V 60 Hz supply source.  Unit
               complies with UL 508, "Electrical Industrial Control
               Equipment," and includes the following features:

               a.   Operation:  Equalizing charging rate of 10
                    amperes is initiated automatically after the
                    battery has lost charge until an adjustable
                    equalizing voltage is achieved at the battery
                    terminals.  The unit then automatically switches
                    to a lower float-charging mode, and continues
                    operating in that mode until the battery is
                    discharged again.
               b.   Automatic Temperature Compensation:  Adjust the
                    float and equalizes voltages for variations in
                    the ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to
                    plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high
                    temperatures and undercharging to low
                    temperatures.
               c.   Automatic Voltage Regulation:  Maintains output
                    voltage constant regardless of input voltage
                    variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
               d.   Ammeter and Voltmeter:  Flush mounted in door. 
                    Meters indicate charging rates.
               e.   Safety Functions:  Include sensing of abnormally
                    low battery voltage arranged to close contacts
                    providing "low battery voltage" indication on
                    control and monitoring panel.  Also include
                    sensing of high battery voltage and loss of
                    a.c.input or d.c. output of battery charger. 
                    Either of these conditions closes contacts that
                    provide "battery charger malfunction" indication
                    at system control and monitoring panel.
               f.   Enclosure and Mounting:  NEMA Class 1 wall-
                    mounted cabinet.

2.12 CONTROL AND MONITORING

     A.   Configuration:  Operating and safety indications,
          protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages
          are grouped on a common control and monitoring panel
          mounted on the generator set.  Mounting method isolates the
          control panel from generator set vibration.

          1.   Generator Circuit Breaker:  Molded case type
               conforming to Division16 Section "Overcurrent
               Protective Devices," and with adjustable ground fault
               tripping.
          2.   Generator Circuit Breaker:  Low-voltage, insulated
               case-type, conforming to Division 16 Section
               "Overcurrent Protection Devices."
          3.   Shunt Trip Device:  For generator breaker, connected
               to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by
               protective devices.
          4.   Current and Potential Transformers:  Instrument
               accuracy class.

     B.   Indicating and Protective Devices, and Controls:  Include
          those required by NFPA 110 for a Level 1 system plus the
          following:

          1.   A.C. Voltmeter.
          2.   A.C. Ammeter.
          3.   A.C. Frequency Meter.
          4.   D.C. Voltmeter (Alternator Battery charging).
          5.   Engine Coolant temperature Gage.
          6.   Engine-Lubricating Oil Pressure Gage.
          7.   Running Time Meter.
          8.   Ammeter/Voltage Phase Selector Switch or Switches.
          9.   Ammeter/Voltage-Adjusting Rheostat.
          10.  Start-Stop Switch.
          11.  Overspeed Shutdown Device.
          12.  High Coolant-Temperature Shutdown Device.
          13.  Low Coolant-Level Shutdown Device.
          14.  Low Oil Pressure Shutdown Device.
          15.  Fuel Tank Derangement Alarm.
          16.  High Fuel Tank Level-Shutdown fof Fuel Supply Alarm.

     C.   Supporting Items:  Include sensors, transducers, teminals,
          relays, and other devices, and wiring required to support
          specified items.  Locate sensors and other supporting items
          on engine, generator, or elsewhere as indicated.  Where not
          indicated, locate to suit manufacturer's standard.

     D.   Connection to Data Link:  A separate terminal block
          factory-wired to Form C dry contacts for each alarm and
          status indication is reserved for connection for
          transmission of indications by data link to remote data
          terminals.  Data system connections to terminals are
          covered in another Section.

     E.   Common Remote Audible Alarms:  Conform to NFPA 110
          requirements for LEvel 1 systems.  Include necessary
          contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel. 
          LOcate audible device and silencing means where indicated.

     F.   Remote Alarm Annunciator:  Comply with NFPA 99, "Health
          Care Facilities."  Labeled LEDs indicate alarm events. 
          Common audible signal sounds for alarm conditions. 
          Silencing switch in face of panel silences signal without
          altering visual indication.  Connect so that after an alarm
          is silenced, clearing of the initiating condition will
          reactivate the alarm until the silencing switch is reset. 
          Cabinet and faceplate are surface-or flush-mounting type to
          suit mounting conditions indicated.

     G.   Remote Emergency Stop Switch:  Flush wall-mounted except as
          otherwise indicated and prominently labeled.  Pushbutton is
          protected from accidental operation.

2.13 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

     A.   Comply with NEMA MG 1, "Motors and Generators," and
          specified performance requirements.

     B.   Drive:  Generator shaft is directly connected to the engine
          shaft.  Exciter is rotated integrally with generator rotor.

     C.   Electrical Insulation:  Class H or Class F.

     D.   Station Winding Leads:  Brought out to terminal box to
          permit future reconnecton for other voltages if required.

     E.   Construction prevents mechanical, electrical, and thermal
          damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of
          rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated
          capacity.

     F.   Excitation uses no-slip or collector rings, or brushes, and
          is arranged to sustain generator output under short circuit
          conditions as specified.

     G.   Enclosure:  Dripproof.

     H.   Instrument Transformers:  Mounted within generator
          enclosure.

     I.   Voltage Regulator:  Solid-state-type, separate from
          exciter, providing performance as specified.

          1.   Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel
               provides plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output
               voltage operating band.

     J.   Surge Protection:  Conform to UL 1449, "Transient Voltage
          Surge Suppressors."  Mount suppressors in generator
          enclosure and connect to load terminals.

     K.   Strip Heater:  Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to
          maintain stator windings above the dew point.

2.14 ELECTRIC MOTORS

     A.   Conform to Division 15 Section "Motors."

2.15 OUTDOOR GENERATOR SET ENCLOSURE

     A.   Description:  Weatherproof steel housing.  Multiple panels
          are lockable and provide adequate access to components
          requireing maintenance.  Panels are removable by one person
          without tools.

     B.   Fixed Louvers:  At air inlet and discharge.  Louvers
          prevent entry of rain and snow.

     C.   Automatic Dampers:  At air inlet and discharge.  Dampers
          are closed to reduce engine and battery heat loss in cold
          weather when unit is not operating.

     D.   Air Flow Through Housing:  Adequate to maintain temperature
          rise of system components within required limits when unit
          operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with
          ambient temperature at the top of the range specified under
          "System Service Conditions."

2.16 FINISHES

     A.   Outdoor Enclosures:  Polyurethane enamel over corrosion-resistant 
          pretreatment and manufacturer's compatible standard primer.

2.17 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

     A.   Factory Tests:  Include prototype testing and Project-
          specific equipment tests (equipment manufactured
          specifically for this Project).

     B.   Prototype Testing:  Performed on a separate engine
          generator set using the same engine model, constructed of
          identical or equivalent components and equipped with
          identical or equivalent accessories.

          1.   Tests:  Conform to those required for Level 1 energy
               converters in paragraphs 3.2.1, 3.2.1.1, and 3.2.1.2
               of NFPA 110.
          2.   Components and Accessories:  Items furnished with
               installed unit that are not identical to those on
               tested prototype have been acceptable tested to
               demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

     C.   Project-Specific Equipment Tests:  Test engine generator
          set and other system components and accessories prior to
          shipment.  Test items individually and assembled and
          connected as a complete system at the factory in a manner
          equivalent to that required at the Project site.  Record
          and report test data.  Conform to SAE 8528, "Engine Power
          Test Code-Spark Ignition and Diesel,"  and the following:

          1.   Test Equipment:  Use instruments calibrated within the
               previous 12 months and with accuracy directly
               traceable to the National Institute of Standards and
               Technology (NIST).
          2.   Hydrostatic Test:  Perform on radiator, heat
               exchanger, and engine water jacket.
          3.   Generator Tests:  Conform to IEEE 115, "Test
               Procedures for Synchronous Machines."
          4.   Complete System Continuous Operation Test:  Includes
               nonstop operation for a minimum of 8 hours, including
               at least 1 hour each at 1/2, 3/4, and full load, and
               2 hours at 110 percent of full load.  If unit stops
               during the 8-hour test, repeat the complete test. 
               Record the following minimum data at the start and end
               of each load run, at 15-minute intervals between those
               times, and at 15-minute intervals during the balance
               of the test:

               a.   Fuel consumption.
               b.   Exhaust temperture.
               c.   Jacket water temperature.
               d.   Lubricating oil temperature and pressure.
               e.   Generator load current and voltage, each phase.
               f.   Generator system gross and net output kW.

          5.   Complete System Performance Tests:  Include the
               following to demonstrate conformance to specified
               performance requirements:

               a.   Single-steop load pickup.
               b.   Transient and steady-state governing.
               c.   Transient and steady-state voltage performance.
               d.   Safety shutdown devices.

          6.   Observation of Test:  Provide 2-week advance notice of
               tests and opportunity for observation of test by
               Owner's representatives.

          7.   Report tests results within 10 days of completion of
               test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

     A.   Anchor generator set and other system components on
          concrete bases conforming to Division 3 Section "Cast-In-
          Place Concrete" and as indicated.  Provide anchorage
          according to manufacturer's recommendations.

     B.   Field Installation of Piping and Ductwork:  As specified in
          Division 15 Sections "Basis Mechanical Materials and
          Methods" and "Hydronic Piping".

     C.   Exhaust Piping Installation:  Conform to NFPA 211,
          "Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid-Fuel Burning
          Appliances."  Use thimbles where indicated.

     D.   Maintain minimum working space around components according
          to manuracturer's shop drawings and NEC.

     E.   Manufacturer's Field Services:  Arrange and pay for the
          services of a factory-authorized service representative to
          supervise the installing, connecting, testing, and
          adjusting of the unit.

     F.   Manufacturer's Field Services:  Arrange and pay for the
          services of a factory- authorized servide representative to
          supervise the installing, connecting, pretesting, and
          adjusting of the unit.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION

     A.   Identify system components according to Division 15 Section
          "Mechanical Identification" and Division 16 Section
          "Electrical Identification".

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

     A.   Supervised Adjusting and Pretesting:  Under supervision of
          factory-authorized service repesentative, pretest all
          system functions, operations, and protective features. 
          Provide all instruments and equipment required for tests. 
          Adjust to ensure operation is according to Specifications. 
          Load system using a variable resistive and reactive load
          bank simulating kW, and power factor of loads for which
          unit is rated.

     B.   Tests:  Provide the services of a qualified independent
          testing agency to perform the tests listed below according
          to manufacturer's recommendations upon completion of
          installation of system.  Use instruments bearing records of
          calibration within the last 12 months, traceable to NIST
          standards, and adquate for making positive observation of
          test results.  Include the following tests:

          1.   Insulation Tests:  Test generator windings using 500
               V d.c. for units rated up to 250 volts an d 1000 V
               d.c. for units rated between 250 and 600 volts. 
               Verify minimum insulation resistance is 25 megaohms
               for units up to 250 volts, and 100 megaohms for units
               251 to 600 volts.  Verify by dielectric absorption
               test that polarization index levels are according to
               IEEE 43, "Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating
               Machinery."

          2.   Battery Tests:  Measure charging voltage and voltages
               between available battery terminals for full-charging
               and float-charging conditions.  Check electrolyte
               level and specific gravity under both conditions. 
               Test for contact integrity of all connectors.  Perfrom
               an integrity load test and a capacity load test for
               the battery.  Verify acceptance of charge for each
               element of battery after discharge.  Verify
               measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

          3.   Battery Charger Tests:  Verify specified rates of
               charge for both equalizing and float-charging
               conditions.

          4.   System Integrity Tests:  Methodically verify proper
               installation, connection, and integrity of each
               element of engine generator system before and during
               system operation.  Check for air, exhaust, and fluid
               leaks.

          5.   Simulation of malfunctions to verify proper operation
               of local and remote protective, alarm, and monitoring
               devices.

          6.   Load Test:  Use variable load bank capable of
               simulating kVA, kW, and power factor of load for which
               unit is rated.  Run unit at 25, 50, and 75 percent of
               rated capacity for 30 minutes each, and at 100 percent
               for 3 hours.  Make the 100-percent load run at 80
               percent power factor.  Record voltage, frequency, load
               current, battery-charging current, power output, oil
               pressure, and coolant temperature periodically during
               the test.

          7.   Vibration Baseline Test:  Measure amplitude for
               nominal frequency and for frequencies 5, 10, 15, and
               20 percent above and below nominal at each main
               bearing cap.  Vibration levels not exceeding those
               specified in NEMA MG1, "Motors and Generators," are
               acceptable.

          8.   Exhaust System Back-Pressure Test:  Use a manometer
               with a scale exceeding 40 inches of water.  Connect to
               the exhaust line close to the engine exhaust manifold. 
               Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within
               manufacturer's published allowable limits for the
               engine.

          9.   Exhaust Emissions Test:  Conform to applicable
               government test criteria.

          10.  Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests:  Use
               recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and
               frequency transients for 50-percent and 100-percent
               step-load increases and decreases and verify that
               performance is as specified.

          11.  Harmonic Content Tests:  Measure harmonic content of
               input and output current under 25 percent and at 100
               percent of ratedlinear load.  Verify that harmonic
               content is within specified limits.

          12.  Efficiency Tests:  Perform at 50 percent, 75 percent,
               and 100 percent of rated load.

     C.   Retest:  Correct deficiencies identified by tests and
          observations and retest until specified requirements are
          met.

3.04 CLEANING

     A.   Upon completion of installation, inspect system components. 
          Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. 
          Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original
          finish.  Clean components internally using methods and
          materials recommended by manufacturer.

3.05 DEMONSTRATION

     A.   Training:  Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-
          authorized service representative to demonstrate
          adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the system and to
          train Owner's personnel.

     B.   Conduct a minimum of 8 hours of training as specified under
          Instructions to Owner's Employees in the Project Closeout
          Section of these Specifications.

     C.   Schedule training with at least 7-day advance notice.

3.06 COMMISSIONING

     A.   Battery Equalization:  Equalize charging of battery cells
          according to manufacturer's instructios.  Record individual
          cell voltages.




SECTION 16722                                      SECURITY SYSTEM (2.15.97)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

     The requirements of Section 16010, Electrical General
     Provisions, shall apply to all work specified under this
     section.

1.02 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK

     A.   Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment
          and services necessary for the installation and activation
          of a complete security system.

     B.   The security system shall be comprised of the following
          components:

          1.   an intrusion detection system for the cashier's office
          2.   an access control system 
          3.   a door and ground floor window monitoring system 

     C.   Each component shall include all interconnecting wiring,
          raceways, to protect the wiring, power supplies and
          connections to the electrical system.

     D.   The security system shall interface with the existing
          system on the University of Maryland College Park Campus.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

     A.   The manufacturer shall be a company specializing in
          security systems with not less than five years experience.

     B.   The installer shall be a company specializing in security
          alarm systems with not less than three years of experience
          in the installation of access control systems.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

     A.   Shop Drawings

          1.   The contractor shall provide complete shop drawings
               that shall include but not be limited to a complete
               system layout, and complete wiring diagrams.

          2.   Plans shall be submitted for approval before equipment
               is installed.

     B.   Product Data

          1.   The contractor shall provide product data sheets for
               each item of equipment.

          2.   The product data sheets shall include but not be
               limited to equipment ratings, finishes, and warnings.

1.05 RECORD DRAWINGS

     A.   The contractor shall provide complete and accurate record
          drawings.

     B.   The drawings shall indicate the actual location of card
          readers, control panels, conduit, junction boxes, system
          sensors and grounding.

     C.   A schedule of nameplates shall be included.

1.06 SYSTEM OPERATION AND FUNCTION

     A.   The system shall include but not be limited to the
          following subsystems:

          1.   An independent security alarm system for cashier.

          2.   An access control system.

          3.   A door and ground floor window monitoring system.

     B.   The system shall operate as follows:

          1.   The security alarm system shall protect the cashier's
               office by detecting unauthorized entry into the space
               and notify the police via telephone line.

          2.   The access control system shall operate by allowing
               access/egress through the courtyard door by authorized
               persons using a valid access card.

          3.   The door and window monitoring system will operate by
               sending a local signal to a console located at the
               front desk area.

          4.   The access control panel shall communicate with a
               central processor via an auto-dial security modem.

          5.   The courtyard door shall be interfaced with the fire
               alarm system.  Upon activation of the fire alarm
               system, the door will allow free egress.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

     A.   The access control panel shall be a Northern N-1000-II.  No
          substitutions permitted.

     B.   The card readers shall be a Wiegand swipe reader as
          provided by Northern Computers, Inc., no substitutions
          permitted.  Mount readers 40 inches above finished floors.

     C.   The electric panic bar for the exterior door shall be a Von
          Duprin Chexit (CX99) device.  A power transfer hinge (EPT
          218)and a power supply (MPB 842) are required.  The
          electric panic bar shall be interconnected into the fire
          alarm system to allow immediate egress upon activation of
          the fire alarm system.

     D.   Communication modem:  Provide one auto-dial auto-answer,
          1200 baud security modem.  Modem shall be Anderson Jacobson
          AJ1212-AD3H or compatible security modem for communication
          with Northern Computer's PC Pack.

     E.   Cards:  Provide 150 Wiegand swipe cards, each encoded with
          a unique number.

2.02 SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM (CASHIER'S OFFICE)

     A.   Alarm control:  Provide one Moose Z1100e Alarm control with
          locks, tamper switches, battery backup, RJ31X jack, and
          phone line monitor.

     B.   Alarm devices:

          1.   Install Sentrol 1078W magnetic contacts on entrance
               doors to cashier's area.

          2.   Install Moose Z1100R keypad inside the entrance of the
               cashier's area.

          3.   Install two C & K dual technology DT-300 motion
               detectors.

          4.   Install Ademco 269 hold-up switches at each cashier
               station.

          5.   Install Bluegrass BGE-9100 glassbreak detectors on
               windows of cashier's office.

          6.   Install Moose JDS-108 siren driver within control box.

          7.   Install MPI-30 siren speaker in a speaker housing
               outside of cashier's office.  Mount blue strobe light
               on speaker housing.  Install tamper switch on box.

          8.   Install capacitance switch on safe.

     C.   Additional Requirements

          1.   System to be placed on an unswitched outlet, and
               placed on the building's emergency power system.

          2.   System must be grounded per manufacturer's
               specifications.

          3.   System requires analog telephone service for
               communication to the University Police.

2.03 DOOR AND GROUND FLOOR WINDOW MONITORING SYSTEM

     A.   The door and ground floor window monitoring system shall
          detect and annunciate the unauthorized opening of ground
          floor windows and selected doors after hours.

     B.   The system shall consist of the following components:

          1.   Install Von Duprin monitor strikes for all exterior
               doors and for select interior doors requiring
               monitoring.

          2.   Install Sentrol glassbreak detectors with contact
               switch on ground floor windows.

          3.   Install Von Duprin LBA-2400 Security console behind
               front desk to annunciate the activation of any sensor.

     C.   Contact factory representative, Paul Frazier, of R.L.
          Frazier, Inc. at (301) 428-9410 to coordinate design and
          ordering.



16726  SECURITY CAMERA EQUIPMENT (7.15.97)                       

PART 1 - GENERAL

     This section applies to security cameras accessories and
     equipment.

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

     A.   Pan-tilt-zoom telemetry controls.
     B.   Multiplexers.
     C.   VCR's.
     D.   Monitors.
     E.   Consoles and Playback Stations.
     F.   Wiring.

1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

     A.   Furnished products shall be listed by Underwriters
          Laboratories. Inc.

     B.   All work shall conform to:

               1.   ANSI.
               2.   National Electric Code (NEC)
               3.   University of Maryland's Division 16 Electrical
                    Standards.

1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

     A.   Design, furnish and install the camera system equipment
          and layout in conformance with IES recommended
          procedures.  All CCTV system components are to be new,
          unused products provided with complete Manufacturer's and
          Contractor's warranty of no less than two years Parts and
          Labor  service.

     B.   Pan-tilt-zoom Telemetry Controls

          The telemetry control shall be an integral control
          function of the Video Multiplexer System.  Any individual
          camera site called by the Multiplexer Control; keyboard
          shall be controllable from the remote site.  A telemetry
          receiver shall be mounted in proximity to each camera
          location.  The telemetry receiver driver shall be
          enclosed in the environmental enclosure where necessary. 
          The telemetry receiver shall be powered by 24 VAC and
          shall incorporate DTMF telemetry protocol delivered via
          twisted pair SL/PP cable.  The receiver shall be a
          Dedicated Micros Model TRC1/024/01 or approved equal.

     C.   Video Multiplexing

          1.   The video multiplexers shall be 16 input color,
               full duplex devices.  They will allow for
               simultaneous time base corrected digital recording
               of all cameras to tape as full screen format. 
               Recording shall be accomplished in a field
               recording sampling method.  Sixteen images, one
               from each camera input shall be recorded in less
               than one second in the  real time' 24 hour mode on
               the specified VCR.

          2.   The multiplexer shall offer live selectable multi-
               screen displays while recording.  Displays shall be
               full quad 3x3, 4x4, or 8 plus 2 on the Main
               Monitor.  The secondary or spot monitor shall be
               full live screen video from any selected camera or
               shall offer sequencing video from selected cameras. 
               The multiplexer shall provide a digital freeze
               frame and a x2 electronic zoom in full screen, in
               live and playback modes, and have the ability to
               digitally  scan' each field of the video.  The
               multiplexer shall feature an adjustable field delay
               schedule for compatibility with virtually any VCR.

          3.   The unit shall feature programmable, digital
               activity detection on all video channels.  Digital
               activity detection shall provide two selectable
               modes of operation: exclusive and interleave.  The
               exclusive mode of activity detection shall record
               cameras showing only activity, while recording
               fewer of the non-active cameras. 

          4.   The multiplexer shall be capable of a telemetry
               control of up to sixteen (16) pan-tilt-zoom cameras
               when utilizing the  telemetry control adaptor
               TAD1/012 at each multiplexer CPU.  Telemetry data
               can be distributed in a serial fashion to each TRC2
               Receiver driver in the system.  The multiplexer
               shall be a Dedicated Micros Uniplex Series 2 Model
               DM/UPX2/D/N/C or approved equal.  

          5.   The multiplexers will use a MC04 Multiport
               Controller so that one operator may control two (2)
               to four (4) multiplexers using a single KBU2
               Control Keyboard.  The control keyboard, output
               monitors, and VCR will be located remotely from the
               Multiplexer CPU.  Remote control of the CPU's will
               be accomplished by the use of the KA01 Keyboard
               Adaptor and a pair of RS232 Line Drivers, such as
               Black Box Model ME-800A or approved equal.

          6.   All video communications between the CPU's, the
               VCR's, and the monitors will be transmitted via
               VTTI Model VTT-7000 Video Transceivers or approved
               equal. 

     D.   VCR's

          Each VCR will be a time lapse VCR with  virtual real
          time' recording capability of 18, fields/seconds in 24
          hour mode as well as additional recording durations of 2,
          6, 12, 24, 48, 72, 120, and 168 hour record modes.  The
          VCR shall have a resolution of 300 lines in color, 350
          lines in monochrome.  The VCR shall have a high-speed
          rewind mechanism to rewind in less than 100 seconds. 
          Search function by time, date, and alarm may be
          accomplished.  The unit shall have a four mode
          job/shuttle search controller.  The VCR shall be the
          Toshiba Model KV-7168.  The VCR's shall be rack mounted
          in a 19" console with a Pelco RM-6010 Mount Kit.  

     E.   Monitors

          Each multiplexer will be equipped with both a main and a
          spot monitor.  These color monitors are to have 19"
          diagonal viewing areas.  Resolution shall be over 400 TV
          lines.  Audio inputs, speakers, and looping BNC video
          inputs are to be available.  Separate S-VHS inputs will
          be available for future requirements.  The monitors shall
          be  Toshiba Model CM1900K Monitors or approved equal. 
          Monitors are to be mounted as requested by the
          University.

     F.   Console and Playback Stations

          1.   When necessary a complete security console with
               provisions to rack mount all recording, control,
               and display equipment will be provided for.

          2.   When necessary, a complete playback station will be
               provided.  This work station will consist of a
               DM/UPX2/S/EM Color Simplex Multiplexer, KBU2
               Keyboard, and Toshiba KV-7168 TL VCR and Toshiba
               CM1900K 19" Color Monitor or approved equals.  The
               playback/review station may also include a Toshiba
               6A Printer Model HC 1200A or approved equal.  The
               printer must also use print paper model HCA-AGN or
               approved equal. This system shall allow for the
               offline review of any archived recorded video from
               the System with selectable, individual playback of
               multiplexed cameras.

     G.   Wiring

          The Contractor is responsible to make all camera
          locations function properly over the University supplied
          24 AWG gauge twisted copper pair cabling provided.  The
          Contractor shall take into account distances involved and
          the copper twisted pair cable specifications listed below
          and supply the necessary equipment to make each camera
          installation function properly.

          All equipment supplied must be compatible with existing
          wiring.
 
          1.   Existing Station Copper Cable

               a.   All unshielded twisted pair (UTP) station
                    copper cable supporting voice communications
                    requirement is AT&T and meets the following
                    technical specifications:

          Gauge:                        24AWG
          Outside Diameter:             0.17 in (4.3 mm)
          Insulation:                   PVC (1010) or ECTFE (2010)
          Maximum DC Resistance:        28.6 Ohms/1000 ft.
          Nominal Mutual Capacitance:   20 nF/1000 ft @ 1 kHz
          Characteristic Impedance      100 Ohms +/- 15% @ 1-16 Mhz
          
          
               b.   All UTP station copper cable supporting data
                    communications is AT&T and meets the following
                    technical specifications:

          Gauge:                        24 AWG
          Outside Diameter:             0.17 in (4.3 mm)
          Insulation:                   PVC (1061) or Teflon (2061)
          Maximum DC Resistance:        28.6 Ohms/1000 ft.
          Nominal Mutual Capacitance:   14 nF/1000 ft @ 1 kHz
          Attenuation:                  6 dB/1000 ft @ 1 kHz
          Characteristic Impedance      100 Ohms +/- 15% @ 1-16 Mhz

               c.   All copper cable and jumpers conform to REA
                    color guide and meet NEC articles 725-38, 3
                    (B) 1, 2, and 3.

          2.   Existing Riser Copper Cable

               All UTP riser copper cable supporting voice and
               data communications is standard 24 gauge, paired
               dual, semi-rigid PVC skin over foamed PE, AT&T, and
               meets the following technical specifications:

          Gauge:                        24 AWG, solid copper
                                        conductor, twisted pair
          DC Resistance:                25.7 Ohms/1000 ft
          Mutual Capacitance:           15.8 pF/ft
          Characteristic Impedance:     100 Ohms @ 1 kHz 
                                        105 Ohms @ 1 Mhz
          Attenuation:                  6.25 dB/1000 ft @ 1 Mhz

          3.   Existing Underground Copper Cable

               All underground copper cable supporting voice and
               data communications is standard 24 gauge, paired
               dual- insulated , with foam skin and plastic ,
               surrounded by FLEXGEL filling compound, AT&T, and
               meets the following technical specifications:

          Gauge:                        24 AWG, solid copper
                                        conductor
          DC Resistance:                27.3 Ohms/1000 ft
          Mutual Capacitance:           15.7 pF/ft
          Characteristic Impedance:     100 Ohms @ 1 kHz 
          Attenuation:                  6.25 dB/1000 ft @ 1 Mhz

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

     Manufacturer:  Company specializing in manufacturing products
     specified in this section with minimum five years experience.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

     Accurately record actual locations of each camera with the
     switching arrangements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES

     Equipment supplied shall be compatible with existing
     equipment.

2.02 CAMERA EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES

     A.   Internal Wiring:  Component wiring within enclosures
          shall be UL Listed.

     B.   Labels:  All fixtures shall bear UL Wet Location and
          I.B.E.W. labels.  

2.03 SPLICES, TAPS

     A.   All splices underground in handholes or other wet
          locations shall be waterproof and made with Scotchcast 85
          Multi-Mold Splicing Kits, or approved equal.

     B.   All taps shall use suitable connectors such as Burndy
          Type Ks and taped with two layers of 3M Scotch Brand or
          approved equal rubber tape and six layers of vinyl
          plastic electrical tape. 

     C.   Splices in handholes shall be supported on bricks 8
          inches above the bottom of the handhole.  Slices shall be
          kept to a minimum and are prohibited in locations other
          then handholes, pullboxes or lighting unit bases, except
          for the purposes of retaining circuity of any existing
          underground wiring where existing poles or wiring are
          distributed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

     A.   Examine adjacent surfaces to determine that surfaces are
          ready to receive work.

     B.   Examine each piece of equipment to determine suitability
          for location specified.

3.02 INSTALLATION

     A.   Install camera equipment and accessories in accordance
          with manufacturers instructions.

          1.   Install equipment in consoles.

          2.   Connect equipment to the branch circuits and cables
               provided by university or Contractor.

          3.   Bond products and metal accessories to the branch
               circuit equipment grounding conductor.

     B.   Equipment shall be located clear of exit signs, speakers,
          smoke detectors, pipes, ducts, and other mounted
          equipment. 

     C.   Open trenches shall be limited to 30 linear feet before
          backfilling.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

     A.   Adjust equipment as directed by the University.

     B.   Clean paint splatters, dirt, and debris from installed
          equipment.

     C.   Touch up enclosures, buildings, and interior finish at
          completion of work.

     D.   Replace equipment and mounts which have failed at
          completion of work.

3.04 COORDINATION

     A.   Confirm compatibility and interface of other materials
          with CCTV system.  Report discrepancies to the
          University.

     B.   Supply trim rings, backboxes, etc. to other trades as
          necessary.

     C.   Coordinate with Division 15 to avoid conflicts between
          cameras, supports, fittings, and mechanical equipment.

     D.   Before ordering, confirm construction details and
          architectural finish for each area.

3.05 ACCEPTANCE

     A.   Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
          University that all equipment is operating properly.  Any
          faulty equipment shall be replaced at the Contractor's
          expense.  The Contractor shall demonstrate operation of
          all installed equipment.



16782  SECURITY CAMERAS (EXTERIOR) (7.15.97)                      


PART 1 - GENERAL

     This section applies to exterior and parking garage security
     cameras.

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

     A.   Exterior Cameras and accessories.

     B.   Poles and brackets.

1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

     A.   Furnished products shall be listed by Underwriters
          Laboratories. Inc.

     B.   All work shall conform to:
     
          1.    ANSI.

          2.   National Electric Code (NEC)

          3.   University of Maryland's Division 16 Electrical Standards.
     
1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

     A.   Design, furnish and install the exterior camera system
          layout in conformance with IES recommended procedures and
          foot candle requirements as specified below.  All
          exterior cameras shall be 120 VAC stepped down to 24 VAC.
          All CCTV system components are to be new, unused products
          provided with complete Manufacturer's and Contractor's
          warranty of no less than two years Parts and Labor
          complete service.

     B.   Cameras

          The camera shall be a 1/3 inch format interline transfer
          CCD, color camera.  The camera shall have a 380,000 pixel
          array producing 480 lines horizontal resolution with 50db
          signal/noise ratio.  Sensitivity shall be a minimum of 2
          lux.  The camera shall include auto back light
          compensation circuitry.  It shall accept C mount optics
          to accommodate the zoom lens required.  The camera shall
          be a Panasonic  WV-CP614 or approved equal.  For areas
          with low levels of lighting or other darkening conditions
          consideration will be given to using a different dual
          scan technology camera.

     C.   Lens

          Lens-1 (Harris Domed Sites), the complete
          camera/lens/connector package must be compact enough to
          fit internally into the Environmental Dome.  The zoom
          lens shall be a 10x auto-iris with a minimum focal length
          of 8.5-51MM.  The lens shall include an integral spot
          filter.  Mechanical dimensions shall be such that the
          lens and camera combination will fit in the enclosure.  
          The lens shall include a preset position potentiometer. 
          

          Lens-2 (Free Standing Code Blue Sites), the complete
          camera/lens/connector package must be compact enough to
          fit internally to the Free Standing Code Blue Telephone
          enclosure which are approximately 11" in diameter.  The
          zoom lens shall be a 6x auto-iris with a minimum focal
          length of 8.5-51MM.  The lens shall include an integral
          spot filter.  Lens includes a preset position
          potentiometer.

          Lens-3 (Legacy Series Environmental enclosured Sites),
          the complete camera/lens/connector package must be
          compact enough to fit internally into the Environmental
          Enclosure.  The zoom lens shall be a 10x auto-iris with
          a minimum focal length of 8.5-51MM.  The lens shall
          include an integral spot filter. The lens shall include
          a preset position potentiometer.  

     D.   Environmental Enclosures

          All exterior camera sites are to be configured in an
          environmental enclosure which incorporates a 360 degree
          rotation  pan and tilt devise to allow for camera viewing
          in all directions from the camera site location.  Two
          types of environmental enclosures shall be utilized.

          Enclosure-1  The Harris Dome enclosure.  The enclosure
          shall incorporate a 20" lower hemisphere with a black  
          opaque lower dome with a clear viewing slot. The 
          environmental dome shall include factory installed
          heater,blower, and service light.  The service light
          shall automatically come on when the lower dome is
          opened. The dome is to be powered by 110 VAC.  The
          integral pan-tilt will be pre-wired for all system
          functions.  The environmental dome shall be the Pelco 
          ED-2820-SL/PP or approved equal.  Pan-tilt includes preset
          position potentiometer.

          Enclosure-2 Legacy Series Enclosure.  The enclosure is to
          be powered by 110 VAC.  The enclosure will be pre-wired
          for all system functions.  The environmental enclosure
          shall include factory installed heater. This heated
          enclosure system shall be a Pelco Model EH4718L-2 with a
          PT480-24P/PP (pan & tilt), SS4718L (sun shroud), and a
          PM-4010 (mount)or approved equal.

     E.   Mounts

          An appropriate mounting device will be provided at all
          camera locations to provide a stable and accessible means
          of access to the camera site.  The specifics of each site
          location will be determined by local considerations at
          the indicated mounting location during the site walk-
          through.  When domes are mounted to buildings, parapet
          mounts, which incorporate swinging arms for
          serviceability, shall be provided.  Whenever possible,
          domes are preferred to be roof mounted as opposed to wall
          mounted, for maximum serviceability.  Typical building
          mounts shall be Pelco PP200 parapet mounts with Pelco
          PP1200 adaptor/rotation devices or approved equal.  Where
          pole mounted, the mounts shall be Pelco PA102 pole
          adaptors with Pelco ST-1 support struts and Pelco SPA-102
          pole mounts or approved equal.  Where corner mounts are
          to be used, the mount shall be Pelco CM100 or approved
          equal.  Other mounts are to be applied where required. 

     F.   Lighting

          Contractor will assure that adequate area lighting exists
          to allow for the proper viewing of the video images in
          the viewing area.  This may be accomplished by use of the
          appropriate combination of cameras, lenses, environmental
          enclosures, and mounts, as well as, the possible addition
          of exterior lights.  Metal Halide is the preferred
          exterior lighting source.
 
     G.   Parking Garage

          Cameras installed within parking garages will conform to
          the general requirements listed above for cameras,
          lenses, environmental enclosures, mounts and lighting.

1.04 REFERENCES

     A.   Poles - Shall conform to University of Maryland standard
          poles or PERT Telephone (Police Emergency Reporting
          Telephone) Installation Criteria 4.15.97 for Free
          Standing Code Blue Phones with Camera Extensions. 

     B.   Building exterior - Shall be a mountable surface capable
          of bearing a shear weight of 100 lbs.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

     A.   Manufacturer:  Company specializing in manufacturing
          products specified in this section with minimum five
          years experience.

1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

     A.   Accurately record actual locations of each camera with
          the switching arrangements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL CAMERAS AND ACCESSORIES

     A.   Environmental enclosures, complete with gaskets to form
          weatherproof assembly.

     B.   Low temperature operation to zero degrees Fahrenheit.

     C.   Camera enclosure shall be vandal-proof.

     E.   Transceivers supplied shall be compatible with existing
          equipment.

     F.   Camera's mounted on parapets must not be mounted on false
          parapets.

     
2.02  EXTERIOR CAMERAS AND ACCESSORIES

     General Description: 

     A.   Internal Wiring:  Component wiring within enclosures
          shall be UL Listed.

     B.   Enclosure Exterior Finish: Shall be aluminum with
          polyester powder finish and an Acrylic or Polycarbonate
          viewing cover. 

     C.   Labels:  All fixtures shall bear UL Wet Location and
          I.B.E.W. labels.  
     
2.03 POLES

     A.   Poles shall be compatible with other University Standard
          Poles.

     B.   Free Standing Code Blue Phone Camera Mounts shall be
          compatible with the Code Blue equipment.

2.04 SPLICES, TAPS

     A.   All splices underground in handholes or other wet
          locations shall be waterproof and made with Scotchcast 85
          Multi-Mold Splicing Kits, or approved equal.

     B.   All Taps in pole bases shall use suitable connectors such
          as Burndy Type Ks and taped with two layers of 3M Scotch
          Brand or approved equal rubber tape and six layers of
          vinyl plastic electrical tape.  Tap wiring to the
          luminaire shall incorporate a Bus type HEB waterproof in-
          line fuseholder with this as recommended by the ballast
          manufacturer and #12 XHHW conductors.

     C.   Splices in handholes shall be supported on bricks 8
          inches above the bottom of the handhole.  Slices shall be
          kept to a minimum and are prohibited in locations other
          then handholes, pullboxes or lighting unit bases, except
          for the purposes of retaining circuity of any existing
          underground wiring where existing poles or wiring are
          distributed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

     A.   Examine adjacent surfaces to determine that surfaces are
          ready to receive work.

     B.   Examine each camera, lens, and mount to determine
          suitability for location specified.

3.02 INSTALLATION

     A.   Install cameras and accessories in accordance with
          manufacturers instructions.

          1.